Nastar GSM User Manual

GENEX Nastar GSM V200R005
User Manual
Issue Date Part Number
03 2008-04-07 31018397
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: Email: http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document provides guides to get the related versions, intended audience, conventions, and update history of the GENEX Nastar GSM.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name GENEX Nastar GSM Version V200R005
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:

Network planning and optimization engineers Technical support engineer
Organization
This document consists of twelve chapters and an appendix and is organized as follows. Chapter 1 Overview Content This chapter introduces the basic information about the GENEX Nastar GSM, which consists of basic functions, networking topology, software configuration and workflow of different versions, corresponding product versions, and application scenarios. This chapter describes the installation of the GENEX Nastar GSM, which consists of the installation and uninstallation of the GENEX Nastar GSM and the components.
2 Installation of the Nastar GSM
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
About This Document
Chapter 3 GUI
Content This chapter describes the GENEX Nastar GSM and the user interface of the tool. The user interface consists of the Nastar GSM user interface and the Transdata user interface. This chapter describes the basic operations of the Transdata. This chapter describes the commonly performed operations of the GENEX Nastar GSM. This chapter describes the geographic display of the Nastar GSM. Describes the procedure for automatically optimizing neighbors Describes the procedure for automatically optimizing frequency This chapter describes the types, operations, and settings of the network performance alarms. This chapter describes the functions of monitoring report and the procedures for generating monitoring reports. This chapter describes the functions of problem locating and procedures for locating network problems. This chapter describes the network expansion analysis, location area expansion analysis, and radio resource utilization analysis. This chapter provides solutions to the faults that the Nastar CDMA incurs. This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations in this document. The appendix contains the data collection tool, GSM index definitions, engineering parameters, shortcut keys, and acronyms and abbreviations.
4 Using the Transdata 5 Common Operations 6 Optimizing the Network 7 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors 8 Automatic Optimization of Frequency 9 Network Performance Alarms 10 Generating a Network Monitoring Report 11 Further Locating Network Problems 12 Predicting Network Trend 13 FAQ 14 Acronyms and Abbreviations Appendix
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
About This Document
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
General Conventions
Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected. Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
About This Document
Convention { x | y | ... } *
Description Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, windows, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Key 1, Key 2
Mouse Operation
Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
About This Document
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-29)

Initial release.

Second release

Third release
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Contents
Contents
1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM ....................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Software Structure................................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.3 Networking Mode ................................................................................................................................1-4 1.1.4 Server/Client Mode..............................................................................................................................1-9 1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode ............................................................................................................................. 1-11 1.1.6 NE Version .........................................................................................................................................1-12 1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM .................................................................................................................1-13 1.2.1 Application Scenarios ........................................................................................................................1-13 1.2.2 Application Modes .............................................................................................................................1-13
2 Installation of the Nastar GSM ...............................................................................................2-1

2.1 Introduction to the Installation ......................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 Requirements for User .........................................................................................................................2-2 2.1.2 Flow Chart ...........................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Preparing the PNS .........................................................................................................................................2-3 2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server ..................................................................................................2-3 2.2.2 Checking the System Environment......................................................................................................2-5 2.3 Installing the Related Software .....................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server.....................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.2 Installing the MSDE ..........................................................................................................................2-29 2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Components .......................................................................................2-30 2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM..................................................................................................................2-33 2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory ....................................................................................................2-41 2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM ......................................................................................................................2-42 2.5.1 Flow Chart .........................................................................................................................................2-42 2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Components ..................................................................................2-43 2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM.............................................................................................................2-46 2.6 License Management...................................................................................................................................2-49 2.6.1 Installing the Dongle..........................................................................................................................2-49 2.6.2 Updating the License .........................................................................................................................2-50
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Contents
3 GUI................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI...........................................................................................................................................3-2 3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI........................................................................................................................3-2 3.1.2 Menu Bar .............................................................................................................................................3-3 3.1.3 Toolbar ...............................................................................................................................................3-10 3.1.4 Function Window...............................................................................................................................3-13 3.1.5 Property Window ...............................................................................................................................3-20 3.1.6 Site View............................................................................................................................................3-21 3.2 GUI of the Transdata ...................................................................................................................................3-22 3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata ...........................................................................................3-22 3.2.2 Menu Bar ...........................................................................................................................................3-23 3.2.3 Toolbar ...............................................................................................................................................3-26 3.2.4 Project View.......................................................................................................................................3-27 3.2.5 Main View..........................................................................................................................................3-27 3.2.6 Output Window..................................................................................................................................3-28
4 Using the Transdata...................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Basic Operation.............................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 Starting the SQL Server .......................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 Starting the Transdata...........................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.3 Closing the Transdata...........................................................................................................................4-5 4.2 NE Operations...............................................................................................................................................4-6 4.2.1 Creating a Network ..............................................................................................................................4-6 4.2.2 Creating a BSC ....................................................................................................................................4-8 4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC ...............................................................................................................................4-12 4.2.4 Deleting a BSC ..................................................................................................................................4-12 4.2.5 Adding a PCU ....................................................................................................................................4-13 4.2.6 Deleting a PCU ..................................................................................................................................4-15 4.2.7 Deleting a Network ............................................................................................................................4-16 4.2.8 Network Swap....................................................................................................................................4-17 4.3 Data Management .......................................................................................................................................4-20 4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data ...................................................................................................4-20 4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data ...................................................................................................4-22 4.3.3 Statically Importing Performance Data..............................................................................................4-24 4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data ........................................................................................4-28 4.3.5 Deleting History Data ........................................................................................................................4-31 4.4 Task Management .......................................................................................................................................4-33 4.4.1 Initializing a Task...............................................................................................................................4-33 4.4.2 Backing Up a Task .............................................................................................................................4-35 4.4.3 Restoring a Task.................................................................................................................................4-36 4.5 Drawing Out Data and Importing Data File ................................................................................................4-37 4.5.1 Drawing Out Data ..............................................................................................................................4-37
ii
Manual Version 03(2008-04-07)
Contents
4.5.2 Importing Data File............................................................................................................................4-39 4.6 LAN and Remote Network .........................................................................................................................4-40 4.6.1 Manually Exporting LAN Data..........................................................................................................4-40 4.6.2 Automatically Exporting LAN Data ..................................................................................................4-42 4.6.3 Manually Importing LAN Data..........................................................................................................4-44 4.6.4 Automatically Importing LAN Data ..................................................................................................4-45 4.7 Transdata Maintainability Operation...........................................................................................................4-47 4.7.1 Importing Data Warning Monitor ......................................................................................................4-47 4.7.2 Log .....................................................................................................................................................4-48
5 Common Operations .................................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Project Management......................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management..............................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Creating a Project.................................................................................................................................5-3 5.1.3 Opening a Project.................................................................................................................................5-5 5.1.4 Modifying and Deleting a Project ........................................................................................................5-7 5.2 Data Management .........................................................................................................................................5-8 5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management .......................................................................................................5-8 5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data...................................................................................................5-12 5.2.3 Managing Project Parameters ............................................................................................................5-25 5.2.4 Management of Performance Data.....................................................................................................5-38 5.2.5 Checking Parameters .........................................................................................................................5-44 5.3 User Management .......................................................................................................................................5-51 5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights ..................................................................................................5-52 5.3.2 Management of User Log ..................................................................................................................5-53 5.4 Managing NEs.............................................................................................................................................5-55 5.4.1 Creating a Site....................................................................................................................................5-55 5.4.2 Editing a Site......................................................................................................................................5-58 5.4.3 Moving a Site.....................................................................................................................................5-59 5.4.4 Deleting a Site....................................................................................................................................5-59 5.4.5 Deleting a Cell ...................................................................................................................................5-60 5.4.6 Querying NE Property .......................................................................................................................5-61 5.5 Managing Map ............................................................................................................................................5-62 5.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................5-62 5.5.2 Importing a Map ................................................................................................................................5-62 5.5.3 General Operation of a Map...............................................................................................................5-65 5.5.4 Managing Map Layers .......................................................................................................................5-67 5.5.5 Managing the Legend.........................................................................................................................5-67 5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions ..................................................................................................................5-69 5.6.1 Setting the Time Range ......................................................................................................................5-69 5.6.2 Setting the Save Path .........................................................................................................................5-69 5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups............................................................................................................................5-70
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
iii
Contents
GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual 5.6.4 Setting the Common Period ...............................................................................................................5-82 5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronization Mode ...............................................................................................5-82 5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups...........................................................................................................................5-84
5.7 Processing the Analysis Result....................................................................................................................5-89 5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table .............................................................................................................5-89 5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart ...........................................................................................................5-100
6 Optimizing the Network ..........................................................................................................6-1

6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Geographic Display.......................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2.1 Background..........................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2.2 Searching a Cell ...................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area or a Site ...................................................................................................6-5 6.2.4 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme ...................................................................................6-13 6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid..............................................................................................................6-16 6.2.6 Switching 900/1800 Layer .................................................................................................................6-17 6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching ...............................................................................................6-19 6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map ...........................................................................................6-19 6.2.9 Modifying Display Setting.................................................................................................................6-22 6.2.10 Map Legend .....................................................................................................................................6-28
7 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors..................................................................................7-1

7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................7-1 7.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Neighbor Optimization.....................................................................................7-2 7.2.1 Importing a Measurement Task for Analysis .......................................................................................7-2 7.2.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis............................................................................7-7 7.3 Procedures for Automatic Optimization of Neighbors ..................................................................................7-9 7.3.1 Manual Optimization ...........................................................................................................................7-9 7.3.2 Other Operations................................................................................................................................7-12
8 Automatic Optimization of Frequency ..................................................................................8-1

8.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Frequency Optimization ...................................................................................8-2 8.2.1 Importing a Measurement Task for Analysis .......................................................................................8-2 8.2.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis............................................................................8-6 8.3 Exporting the Result of Automatic Frequency Optimization ........................................................................8-9
9 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................9-1

9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................9-1 9.2 Types of Performance Alarm.........................................................................................................................9-2 9.2.1 Standard Alarm ....................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2.2 Optional Alarm.....................................................................................................................................9-8 9.2.3 Customizing an Alarm .......................................................................................................................9-16 9.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms........................................................................................9-17
iv
Contents
9.3.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks...............................................................................9-17 9.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks .......................................................................................................................9-20 9.3.3 Alarm Task Process ............................................................................................................................9-21 9.3.4 Creating an Alarm Task......................................................................................................................9-23 9.3.5 Deleting an Alarm Task......................................................................................................................9-26 9.3.6 Modifying an Alarm Task ..................................................................................................................9-27 9.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task ...................................................................................................9-29 9.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for Alarms .............................................................................................9-32 9.4 Setting the Performance Alarms..................................................................................................................9-34
10 Generating a Network Monitoring Report .......................................................................10-1

10.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report...........................................................................................................10-2 10.2.1 Background ......................................................................................................................................10-2 10.2.2 Customizing a Report Template .......................................................................................................10-2 10.2.3 Generating a Daily Report .............................................................................................................10-12 10.2.4 Generating a Weekly Report ..........................................................................................................10-20 10.2.5 Generating a Monthly Report ........................................................................................................10-24 10.2.6 Introduction to the Reports ............................................................................................................10-30 10.2.7 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report .....................................................................10-38 10.3 Network Monitoring Report....................................................................................................................10-38 10.3.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................10-38 10.3.2 Generating the Network Monitoring Report ..................................................................................10-39 10.3.3 Report Description .........................................................................................................................10-47 10.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report.....................................................................................................10-49 10.4.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................10-49 10.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report ...................................................................10-50 10.4.3 Report Description .........................................................................................................................10-52 10.5 Swap Comparison Report........................................................................................................................10-57 10.5.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................10-57 10.5.2 Generating the Swap Comparison Report......................................................................................10-58 10.5.3 Report Description .........................................................................................................................10-61 10.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics ......................................................................................................................10-62 10.6.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................10-62 10.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics .......................................................................................10-62 10.6.3 Generating the Traffic Statistic Report...........................................................................................10-66 10.6.4 Report Description .........................................................................................................................10-68
11 Further Locating Network Problems..................................................................................11-1

11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.2 Analyzing the Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.2.1 Background ...................................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.2.2 Analyzing the Frequency Optimization............................................................................................ 11-3
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Contents
GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual 11.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report ..................................................................... 11-9 11.2.4 Configuration Check Report .......................................................................................................... 11-11 11.2.5 Configuration Parameters Comparison Report .............................................................................. 11-12 11.2.6 Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters ..................................................................... 11-14 11.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project Parameters..................................................... 11-14
11.3 Querying Performance Data .................................................................................................................... 11-14 11.3.1 Background .................................................................................................................................... 11-14 11.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline................................................................................................... 11-14 11.3.3 Drawing Query Result.................................................................................................................... 11-14 11.3.4 Geographical Performance Guideline ............................................................................................ 11-15 11.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line........................................................................... 11-15 11.4 Analyzing Performance ........................................................................................................................... 11-16 11.4.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance..................................................................................................... 11-16 11.4.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs ......................................................................................... 11-36 11.4.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility .................................................................................................... 11-37 11.4.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance....................................................................................... 11-39 11.4.5 Analyzing the Cell Mobility........................................................................................................... 11-41 11.5 Analyzing Frequency............................................................................................................................... 11-45 11.5.1 Background .................................................................................................................................... 11-45 11.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel ................................................................................ 11-46 11.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC.............................................................................................. 11-51 11.5.4 Checking Idle ARFCNS................................................................................................................. 11-54 11.5.5 Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate.............................................................................................. 11-55 11.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA ..................................................................................................... 11-57 11.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization................................................................................................. 11-58 11.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report ........................................................................ 11-60 11.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts .................................................................................................... 11-62 11.6 Analyzing Neighbors............................................................................................................................... 11-64 11.6.1 Background .................................................................................................................................... 11-64 11.6.2 Checking Unidirectional Neighbors............................................................................................... 11-64 11.6.3 Maintaining Relation of Neighbors................................................................................................ 11-66 11.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation ................................................................................................... 11-70 11.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format.................................................................... 11-70 11.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation ......................................................................................................... 11-74 11.6.7 Clearing Cell Neighbor Relation.................................................................................................... 11-76 11.6.8 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors.............................................................................................. 11-78 11.6.9 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script ........................................................................................... 11-80 11.7 Analyzing the TRX Performance ............................................................................................................ 11-80 11.7.1 Background .................................................................................................................................... 11-80 11.7.2 Analyzing the Measurement Report ............................................................................................... 11-81 11.7.3 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance ....................................................................... 11-85 11.8 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder .................................................................................................................. 11-87
vi
Contents
11.8.1 Background .................................................................................................................................... 11-87 11.8.2 Procedures...................................................................................................................................... 11-88 11.9 Analyzing Auto Frequency Optimize ...................................................................................................... 11-93 11.9.1 Background .................................................................................................................................... 11-93 11.9.2 Procedures...................................................................................................................................... 11-93
12 Predicting Network Trend ...................................................................................................12-1

12.1 Network Expansion Report .......................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.1 Background ......................................................................................................................................12-2 12.1.2 Procedure .........................................................................................................................................12-2 12.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity ..........................................................................................................12-8 12.2.1 Background ......................................................................................................................................12-8 12.2.2 Generating an LAC Capacity Analysis Report ................................................................................12-8 12.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report .......................................................................12-13 12.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio ...........................................................................................12-14 12.3.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................12-14 12.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell .......................................................................................12-14 12.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells .....................................................................................................12-16 12.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells .......................................................................................................12-17 12.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours ......................................................................................12-19
13 FAQ ...........................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Installing Notice ........................................................................................................................................13-2 13.1.1 MSDE is Recommended in the Stand-alone Version .......................................................................13-2 13.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar ...........................................................13-2 13.2 Problems of Running Program ..................................................................................................................13-3 13.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License..............................................................................................13-3 13.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.4 Hard Dongle Version?..........................................................................................................................................13-6 13.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?..............................................................................13-6 13.3 Problems of Importing Data ......................................................................................................................13-7 13.3.1 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the Latest Version?............................................................................................................................................13-7 13.3.2 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM Version? ......................................................................................................................................................13-7 13.3.3 Importing Performance Data Error ..................................................................................................13-8 13.3.4 Common Problems in Performance Data Import .............................................................................13-9 13.4 Functional Problems................................................................................................................................13-10 13.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters .......................13-10 13.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation.......................................................................................................13-10 13.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relation ............................................................................................................ 13-11 13.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify) ............................................................................................... 13-11 13.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors ....................................................................................... 13-11 13.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations ........................13-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
vii
Contents
GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual 13.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported?........................................................................13-14 13.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running? ..................................................................................................13-14 13.4.9 Language of Task Tree ...................................................................................................................13-15 13.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons ...............................................................................................................13-15 13.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed?................................................13-15 13.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For? .............13-15 13.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For? ...........................................................................................................................................................13-15 13.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Optimization Analysis .............13-16 13.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters? ..................................................................................................................................................................13-16 13.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is inconsistent with That of Frequency Optimization Check ........................................................................................................................................................13-16 13.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in the Network Monitoring Report.....13-17 13.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Box Is Not the Related Function Dialog Box, Why?.........................................................................................................................................................13-18 13.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the View Can Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing? ..................................................................................................................................................................13-19
13.5 Others ......................................................................................................................................................13-22 13.5.1 Obtaining the Data from the Earlier-Version .................................................................................13-22 13.5.2 From Tab File to MapX File ..........................................................................................................13-28 13.5.3 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM .........................................................13-29
14 Acronyms and Abbreviations..............................................................................................14-1
viii
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000) ........................................1-5 Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)...........................................1-7 Figure 1-3 Workflow of the Nastar GSM .........................................................................................................1-10 Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM ..........................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box.........................................................................................2-6 Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box ..................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.............................................................................2-8 Figure 2-5 Initial installation interface .............................................................................................................2-10 Figure 2-6 Installation type selection screen .................................................................................................... 2-11 Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar........................................................................................................................... 2-11 Figure 2-8 Welcome dialog box .......................................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-9 Computer Name dialog box............................................................................................................2-13 Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog box...................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-11 User Information dialog box .........................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-12 Software License Agreement dialog box ......................................................................................2-16 Figure 2-13 CD-Key dialog box.......................................................................................................................2-17 Figure 2-14 Installation Definition dialog box .................................................................................................2-18 Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box.............................................................................................................2-19 Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog box ..................................................................................................................2-20 Figure 2-17 Select Components dialog box .....................................................................................................2-21 Figure 2-18 Services Accounts dialog box .......................................................................................................2-22 Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode ....................................................................................................................2-23 Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog box........................................................................................................2-24 Figure 2-21 Network Libraries dialog box .......................................................................................................2-25 Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box .....................................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box .............................................................................................2-27
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
ix
Figures
Figure 2-24 Setup Complete dialog box...........................................................................................................2-28 Figure 2-25 Welcome dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-29 Figure 2-26 Installation progress bar................................................................................................................2-29 Figure 2-27 Welcome dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-30 Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog box .....................................................................................................2-31 Figure 2-29 Setup Status progress dialog box ..................................................................................................2-32 Figure 2-30 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box ...................................................................................2-33 Figure 2-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box ...............................................2-34 Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog box .....................................................................................................2-35 Figure 2-33 Customer Information dialog box.................................................................................................2-36 Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog box ..................................................................................................................2-37 Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box ......................................................................................2-38 Figure 2-36 Select Program Folder dialog box.................................................................................................2-39 Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box.................................................................................................................2-40 Figure 2-38 Maintenance Complete dialog box ...............................................................................................2-41 Figure 2-39 Flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................2-43 Figure 2-40 Add or Remove Programs dialog box...........................................................................................2-44 Figure 2-41 Welcome dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-45 Figure 2-42 Confirm Uninstall dialog box .......................................................................................................2-45 Figure 2-43 Uninstall Complete dialog box .....................................................................................................2-46 Figure 2-44 Uninstalling the GENEX GSM dialog box...................................................................................2-47 Figure 2-45 Welcome dialog box .....................................................................................................................2-48 Figure 2-46 Confirm Uninstall dialog box .......................................................................................................2-48 Figure 2-47 Uninstall Complete dialog box .....................................................................................................2-49 Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM....................................................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Menu bar...........................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Submenus of the Project menu .........................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu .....................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-5 Submenus of the Neighbors Analysis menu .....................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-6 Submenus of the Analysis Reports menu..........................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-7 Submenus of the Geographic Display menu.....................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu ............................................................................................................3-7 Figure 3-9 Submenus of the Window menu .......................................................................................................3-9
Figures
Figure 3-10 Help menu.......................................................................................................................................3-9 Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar ......................................................................................................3-10 Figure 3-12 Network Optimization toolbar ...................................................................................................... 3-11 Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar ..........................................................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar......................................................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-15 Network Element pane..................................................................................................................3-14 Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE.......................................................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-17 Network Monitor pane..................................................................................................................3-16 Figure 3-18 Network Trend pane .....................................................................................................................3-17 Figure 3-19 Performance Alarm pane ..............................................................................................................3-18 Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane ..................................................................................................................3-19 Figure 3-21 Property window...........................................................................................................................3-20 Figure 3-22 Site View window.........................................................................................................................3-21 Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata................................................................................................3-22 Figure 3-24 Menu bar.......................................................................................................................................3-23 Figure 3-25 File menu ......................................................................................................................................3-23 Figure 3-26 View menu ....................................................................................................................................3-23 Figure 3-27 Tools menu....................................................................................................................................3-24 Figure 3-28 Options dialog box........................................................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-29 Help menu.....................................................................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-30 Toolbar..........................................................................................................................................3-26 Figure 3-31 Project view ..................................................................................................................................3-27 Figure 3-32 Main view .....................................................................................................................................3-27 Figure 3-33 Output window .............................................................................................................................3-28 Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog box..........................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-4 Main interface of the Transdata ........................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-5 Quit menu .........................................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-6 Quit dialog box .................................................................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-7 Network Information dialog box ......................................................................................................4-7 Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box ................................................................................................................4-9 Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU .............................................................................................................................4-9
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xi
Figures
Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32 ............................................................................................................................4-10 Figure 4-11 Creating BSC6000 ........................................................................................................................ 4-11 Figure 4-12 Information dialog box ................................................................................................................. 4-11 Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog box ..............................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog box...............................................................................................................4-12 Figure 4-15 Add BSC\PCU dialog box ............................................................................................................4-14 Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box................................................................................................................4-14 Figure 4-17 Success load message ...................................................................................................................4-15 Figure 4-18 Information dialog box .................................................................................................................4-15 Figure 4-19 Confirmation dialog box...............................................................................................................4-15 Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu...............................................................................................................................4-16 Figure 4-21 Confirmation dialog box...............................................................................................................4-17 Figure 4-22 Shortcut menu...............................................................................................................................4-18 Figure 4-23 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box ................................................................................4-19 Figure 4-24 Swap success messages ................................................................................................................4-19 Figure 4-25 BSC information...........................................................................................................................4-20 Figure 4-26 Button in the File Path column .....................................................................................................4-20 Figure 4-27 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-21 Figure 4-28 Successful import of configuration data .......................................................................................4-21 Figure 4-29 PCU information dialog box.........................................................................................................4-22 Figure 4-30 The button in file path...................................................................................................................4-22 Figure 4-31 Browse for Folder .........................................................................................................................4-23 Figure 4-32 Successful import of configuration data .......................................................................................4-23 Figure 4-33 Options dialog box........................................................................................................................4-24 Figure 4-34 Tasks Information dialog box .......................................................................................................4-26 Figure 4-35 Check Task Time dialog box.........................................................................................................4-27 Figure 4-36 Import success information...........................................................................................................4-27 Figure 4-37 Created BSC .................................................................................................................................4-28 Figure 4-38 Import Task setting dialog box......................................................................................................4-28 Figure 4-39 Import Task setting dialog box......................................................................................................4-29 Figure 4-40 dynamically import setting dialog box .........................................................................................4-30 Figure 4-41 The parameters can not be modified .............................................................................................4-31 Figure 4-42 Shortcut menu...............................................................................................................................4-32
xii
Figures
Figure 4-43 Information dialog box .................................................................................................................4-32 Figure 4-44 History Data dialog box................................................................................................................4-33 Figure 4-45 Shortcut menu...............................................................................................................................4-34 Figure 4-46 Message displayed during task initialization ................................................................................4-34 Figure 4-47 Message of task backup ................................................................................................................4-35 Figure 4-48 Message of task restore.................................................................................................................4-36 Figure 4-49 Draw out data................................................................................................................................4-37 Figure 4-50 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................4-38 Figure 4-51 The prompt of drawing out data successfully ...............................................................................4-38 Figure 4-52 Data import ...................................................................................................................................4-39 Figure 4-53 Restore time select........................................................................................................................4-40 Figure 4-54 The prompt of importing successfully ..........................................................................................4-40 Figure 4-55 Export Net Common Data ............................................................................................................4-41 Figure 4-56 Browse for Folder .........................................................................................................................4-41 Figure 4-57 The prompt of exporting successfully...........................................................................................4-42 Figure 4-58 Setting the auto export data ..........................................................................................................4-43 Figure 4-59 Import Net Common Data ............................................................................................................4-44 Figure 4-60 Open Data .....................................................................................................................................4-45 Figure 4-61 Data Import Setting.......................................................................................................................4-46 Figure 4-62 Browse for Folder .........................................................................................................................4-46 Figure 4-63 Exception Watch ...........................................................................................................................4-47 Figure 4-64 Log Setting ...................................................................................................................................4-48 Figure 4-65 Browse for Folder .........................................................................................................................4-49 Figure 5-1 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 New Project dialog box ....................................................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog box ..................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-5 Login dialog box...............................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-6 Project menu .....................................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-7 Browse for Folder dialog box .........................................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-8 Information dialog box ...................................................................................................................5-15 Figure 5-9 Progress bar ....................................................................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-10 Total Records information dialog box ..........................................................................................5-16
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xiii
Figures
Figure 5-11 Reloading cell information and Huawei neighbor relations wait progress bar .............................5-16 Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog box ......................................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-13 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-14 Information dialog box .................................................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box .........................................................................5-19 Figure 5-16 Information dialog box .................................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-17 Synchronization Report dialog box ..............................................................................................5-20 Figure 5-18 Output result window ...................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane..............................................................................................5-22 Figure 5-20 Submenu of exporting configuration parameters..........................................................................5-23 Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter table exported in an .xls file..................................................................5-23 Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog box ...................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file ..........................................................................5-25 Figure 5-24 Open dialog box............................................................................................................................5-26 Figure 5-25 Select Table dialog box.................................................................................................................5-26 Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog box .............................................................................................................5-27 Figure 5-27 Confirming information dialog box ..............................................................................................5-28 Figure 5-28 Successfully importing the project parameter...............................................................................5-28 Figure 5-29 Output dialog box .........................................................................................................................5-30 Figure 5-30 Compare project parameters menu ...............................................................................................5-31 Figure 5-31 Result of comparing project parameters .......................................................................................5-32 Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet ...............................................................................................................5-33 Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet..................................................................................................................5-33 Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet ..................................................................................................5-34 Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter dialog box...........................................................................................5-35 Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter dialog box...........................................................................................5-36 Figure 5-37 Information box after you upload the project parameters .............................................................5-37 Figure 5-38 Information box after you download the project parameters ........................................................5-37 Figure 5-39 Data Backup command.................................................................................................................5-39 Figure 5-40 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................5-40 Figure 5-41 Progress bar ..................................................................................................................................5-40 Figure 5-42 Data backup complete dialog box.................................................................................................5-41 Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu ..................................................................................................................5-42
xiv
Figures
Figure 5-44 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................5-43 Figure 5-45 Progress bar ..................................................................................................................................5-43 Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog box .................................................................................................5-43 Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box ..............................................................5-44 Figure 5-48 Browse for Folder dialog box .......................................................................................................5-45 Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page ...................................................................................................5-46 Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file ........................................................................5-48 Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting..........................................................................................................5-49 Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file ......................................5-50 Figure 5-53 User Management dialog box .......................................................................................................5-52 Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box ...............................................................................................5-53 Figure 5-55 User Log dialog box .....................................................................................................................5-54 Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box ......................................................................................................................5-56 Figure 5-57 Cell Information tab page .............................................................................................................5-57 Figure 5-58 Site Edit dialog box ......................................................................................................................5-58 Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation .............................................................................5-59 Figure 5-60 Confirmation dialog box...............................................................................................................5-60 Figure 5-61 Confirmation dialog box...............................................................................................................5-60 Figure 5-62 Property window...........................................................................................................................5-61 Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog box......................................................................................................5-63 Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box ...............................................................................................................5-64 Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog box ..........................................................................................5-65 Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar ...........................................................................................................................5-65 Figure 5-67 Layer Control dialog box..............................................................................................................5-67 Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis ......................................................................5-68 Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking ......................................................................5-68 Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder ........................................................................................................................5-70 Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................5-71 Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog box ..........................................................................................................5-72 Figure 5-73 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................5-73 Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog box...........................................................................................................5-74 Figure 5-75 Cell Group dialog box ..................................................................................................................5-75 Figure 5-76 Cell Group ....................................................................................................................................5-76
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xv
Figures
Figure 5-77 Cell group .....................................................................................................................................5-77 Figure 5-78 Open .............................................................................................................................................5-78 Figure 5-79 Select table....................................................................................................................................5-78 Figure 5-80 Import Setting ...............................................................................................................................5-79 Figure 5-81 Import Setting ...............................................................................................................................5-80 Figure 5-82 Cell group repeated.......................................................................................................................5-80 Figure 5-83 Import information........................................................................................................................5-81 Figure 5-84 Importing cell group files .............................................................................................................5-81 Figure 5-85 Common Period Setting dialog box..............................................................................................5-82 Figure 5-86 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box......................................................................................5-83 Figure 5-87 Synchronization Report dialog box ..............................................................................................5-83 Figure 5-88 BSC Group dialog box..................................................................................................................5-84 Figure 5-89 New BSC Group dialog box .........................................................................................................5-85 Figure 5-90 BSC Group dialog box..................................................................................................................5-86 Figure 5-91 BSC Group Edit dialog box ..........................................................................................................5-87 Figure 5-92 BSC Group dialog box..................................................................................................................5-88 Figure 5-93 Delete BSC group .........................................................................................................................5-88 Figure 5-94 Quick Draw Setting dialog box ....................................................................................................5-90 Figure 5-95 Quick drawing ..............................................................................................................................5-91 Figure 5-96 Sum of a selected row...................................................................................................................5-93 Figure 5-97 Result sorting ................................................................................................................................5-94 Figure 5-98 Filtering query results ...................................................................................................................5-95 Figure 5-99 Stretching window ........................................................................................................................5-96 Figure 5-100 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu .......................................................................................5-97 Figure 5-101 Draw Selected Column on Map option.......................................................................................5-98 Figure 5-102 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box......................................................................5-99 Figure 5-103 Geographical display of performance data ...............................................................................5-100 Figure 5-104 Quick drawing ..........................................................................................................................5-101 Figure 5-105 Chart analysis menu..................................................................................................................5-103 Figure 5-106 Legend ......................................................................................................................................5-104 Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog box ....................................................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-2 searching a cell .................................................................................................................................6-4 Figure 6-3 Location area displaying setting dialog box .....................................................................................6-5
xvi
Figures
Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog box ...................................................................................................................6-6 Figure 6-5 LAC displayed on the map ...............................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box....................................................................................................................6-8 Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map ..................................................................................................6-9 Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box .....................................................................................................6-10 Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog box .................................................................................................................6-10 Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map......................................................................................... 6-11 Figure 6-11 All sites displayed on the map.......................................................................................................6-12 Figure 6-12 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu ...................................................................6-13 Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-14 Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme ....................................................................................................6-15 Figure 6-15 Reference grid...............................................................................................................................6-16 Figure 6-16 900 MHz layer ..............................................................................................................................6-17 Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer ............................................................................................................................6-18 Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog box .............................................................................................6-19 Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box ...............................................................................................................6-20 Figure 6-20 Display on the map .......................................................................................................................6-21 Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box .....................................................................................................6-22 Figure 6-22 Option dialog box .........................................................................................................................6-23 Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label ....................................................................................................6-24 Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................6-25 Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box.............................................................................................6-26 Figure 6-26 Property window...........................................................................................................................6-27 Figure 6-27 Add Map Mark..............................................................................................................................6-28 Figure 6-28 Map Mark .....................................................................................................................................6-29 Figure 7-1 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors dialog box ............................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Selecting a measurement task file for automatic neighboring cell optimization...............................7-4 Figure 7-3 Information about the imported measurement task...........................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 Advanced Setting dialog box ............................................................................................................7-6 Figure 7-5 Analysis result...................................................................................................................................7-6 Figure 7-6 Manually setting a measurement task ...............................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-7 Task information about the manually entered measurement task .....................................................7-8 Figure 7-8 Defined neighbors and undefined neighbors ....................................................................................7-9
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xvii
Figures
Figure 7-9 Selecting a defined neighbor...........................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-10 Operation result ............................................................................................................................7-10 Figure 7-11 Selecting an undefined neighbor................................................................................................... 7-11 Figure 7-12 Operation result ............................................................................................................................ 7-11 Figure 7-13 Result of bulk optimization...........................................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-14 Exporting optimization data of neighbors.....................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-15 Legends of automatic optimization of neighbors..........................................................................7-13 Figure 8-1 Automatic Optimization of Frequency dialog box............................................................................8-3 Figure 8-2 Selecting a measurement task for automatic frequency optimization...............................................8-4 Figure 8-3 Task information ...............................................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-4 Advanced Setting dialog box ............................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-5 Result of automatic frequency optimization .....................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-6 Manual Task dialog box....................................................................................................................8-7 Figure 8-7 Task information ...............................................................................................................................8-8 Figure 8-8 Exporting the result of automatic frequency optimization................................................................8-9 Figure 9-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree ..................................................................................................9-2 Figure 9-2 Modify alarm task.............................................................................................................................9-3 Figure 9-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box ............................................9-4 Figure 9-4 Alarm condition setting.....................................................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-5 Alarm condition setting modified .....................................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box.................................................9-7 Figure 9-7 Alarm condition setting dialog box...................................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-8 Alarm condition setting dialog box...................................................................................................9-9 Figure 9-9 Alarm condition setting dialog box.................................................................................................9-10 Figure 9-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell ............................................................................................... 9-11 Figure 9-11 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................9-12 Figure 9-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell ....................................................................................................9-13 Figure 9-13 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell................................................................................9-14 Figure 9-14 Alarm of radio connected cell.......................................................................................................9-15 Figure 9-15 Alarm of successful handover cell ................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-16 Starting an alarm task ...................................................................................................................9-17 Figure 9-17 Suspending an Alarm Task............................................................................................................9-18 Figure 9-18 Activating an alarm task ...............................................................................................................9-19
xviii
Figures
Figure 9-19 Performance Alarm navigation tree ..............................................................................................9-20 Figure 9-20 Alarm Operation dialog box .........................................................................................................9-21 Figure 9-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task .....................................................................9-22 Figure 9-22 Creating an alarm task ..................................................................................................................9-23 Figure 9-23 Alarm Template navigation tree....................................................................................................9-23 Figure 9-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................9-24 Figure 9-25 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................9-25 Figure 9-26 Deleting an alarm task ..................................................................................................................9-26 Figure 9-27 Confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task .................................................................9-26 Figure 9-28 Modifying an alarm task ...............................................................................................................9-27 Figure 9-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................9-28 Figure 9-30 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box .............................................................................................9-29 Figure 9-31 History Alarm Search dialog box..................................................................................................9-30 Figure 9-32 Alarm window ..............................................................................................................................9-31 Figure 9-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu .........................................................................................................9-32 Figure 9-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box .............................................................................................9-33 Figure 9-35 Notepad.........................................................................................................................................9-34 Figure 10-1 Report customization template dialog box....................................................................................10-3 Figure 10-2 KPI Dialog box .............................................................................................................................10-4 Figure 10-3 TopN dialog box ...........................................................................................................................10-6 Figure 10-4 Overthreshold dialog box..............................................................................................................10-7 Figure 10-5 New List dialog box......................................................................................................................10-8 Figure 10-6 CHART dialog box .......................................................................................................................10-9 Figure 10-7 Worst Cell dialog box ................................................................................................................. 10-11 Figure 10-8 Daily report command ................................................................................................................10-13 Figure 10-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.........................................................................10-14 Figure 10-10 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box.....................................................................10-16 Figure 10-11 Cell Group dialog box...............................................................................................................10-17 Figure 10-12 New Cell Group dialog box ......................................................................................................10-18 Figure 10-13 Daily report...............................................................................................................................10-19 Figure 10-14 Weekly report command ...........................................................................................................10-20 Figure 10-15 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog box......................................................................10-21 Figure 10-16 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box ...............................................................10-22
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xix
Figures
Figure 10-17 Weekly report............................................................................................................................10-23 Figure 10-18 Monthly report command .........................................................................................................10-25 Figure 10-19 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box...........................................................................10-26 Figure 10-20 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog box..........................................................................10-28 Figure 10-21 Monthly report ..........................................................................................................................10-29 Figure 10-22 KPI sheet in the daily report .....................................................................................................10-30 Figure 10-23 VIC sheet of Daily Report ........................................................................................................10-32 Figure 10-24 KPI sheet of the weekly report..................................................................................................10-34 Figure 10-25 VIC sheet of weekly report .......................................................................................................10-35 Figure 10-26 Network Monitoring Report command.....................................................................................10-40 Figure 10-27 Network Monitoring Report dialog box....................................................................................10-41 Figure 10-28 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page ...........................................................................10-43 Figure 10-29 Index .........................................................................................................................................10-44 Figure 10-30 Network Monitoring Report .....................................................................................................10-46 Figure 10-31 Analysis Reports menu .............................................................................................................10-50 Figure 10-32 PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box...........................................................................10-51 Figure 10-33 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report....................................................10-53 Figure 10-34 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type .............................................10-55 Figure 10-35 The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type.................................................10-56 Figure 10-36 Swap Comparison Report .........................................................................................................10-58 Figure 10-37 Swap Compare..........................................................................................................................10-59 Figure 10-38 Swap Comparison Report .........................................................................................................10-60 Figure 10-39 Report Output dialog box .........................................................................................................10-63 Figure 10-40 Saving a template......................................................................................................................10-65 Figure 10-41 Report output ............................................................................................................................10-67 Figure 10-42 Generating an .xls report...........................................................................................................10-68 Figure 11-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box ......................................................................... 11-3 Figure 11-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there) .................................................................. 11-4 Figure 11-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box...................... 11-5 Figure 11-4 Report Out Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box.................. 11-7 Figure 11-5 Auto Frequency Optimization Report ........................................................................................... 11-8 Figure 11-6 Project Parameter Check dialog box ........................................................................................... 11-10 Figure 11-7 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file ..................................................................................... 11-11
xx
Figures
Figure 11-8 Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box ............................................................. 11-12 Figure 11-9 Configure parameter compare report .......................................................................................... 11-13 Figure 11-10 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box ................................................................................................. 11-15 Figure 11-11 Trouble Shooting item list ......................................................................................................... 11-17 Figure 11-12 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box.......................................................................................... 11-18 Figure 11-13 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-19 Figure 11-14 Objects tab page........................................................................................................................ 11-20 Figure 11-15 Trouble Shooting tab page ........................................................................................................ 11-21 Figure 11-16 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box ......................................................................... 11-22 Figure 11-17 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box .................................... 11-23 Figure 11-18 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box ..................... 11-24 Figure 11-19 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box........................................................................................... 11-26 Figure 11-20 Query Filter Condition dialog box ............................................................................................ 11-27 Figure 11-21 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-28 Figure 11-22 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box ................................................................................................. 11-29 Figure 11-23 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-30 Figure 11-24 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box................................................................................. 11-31 Figure 11-25 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-32 Figure 11-26 Queried Objects tab page .......................................................................................................... 11-33 Figure 11-27 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box .......................................................................................... 11-34 Figure 11-28 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-35 Figure 11-29 Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box ................................................................................ 11-37 Figure 11-30 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-38 Figure 11-31 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) dialog box................................................................. 11-39 Figure 11-32 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-40 Figure 11-33 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) dialog box ...................................................................... 11-41 Figure 11-34 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-42 Figure 11-35 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32) ............................................................................ 11-43 Figure 11-36 Busy Time Modify dialog box .................................................................................................. 11-44 Figure 11-37 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu................................................................................. 11-46 Figure 11-38 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box .............................................................. 11-46 Figure 11-39 Channel check dialog box ......................................................................................................... 11-47 Figure 11-40 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu ......................................................................... 11-47
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xxi
Figures
Figure 11-41 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box .............................................................. 11-48 Figure 11-42 ARFCN Check dialog box ........................................................................................................11-48 Figure 11-43 Check result of the adjacent channel......................................................................................... 11-50 Figure 11-44 Legend window......................................................................................................................... 11-51 Figure 11-45 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu............................................................................................. 11-51 Figure 11-46 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box ................................................................................. 11-52 Figure 11-47 Co-channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog box....................................................................... 11-53 Figure 11-48 Idle ARFCNS menu .................................................................................................................. 11-54 Figure 11-49 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box ................................................................................................. 11-54 Figure 11-50 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box..................................................................................... 11-55 Figure 11-51 Spectrum Utilization menu ....................................................................................................... 11-55 Figure 11-52 Spectrum Utilization dialog box ............................................................................................... 11-56 Figure 11-53 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check ....................................................................... 11-56 Figure 11-54 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu .................................................................................................. 11-57 Figure 11-55 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box .......................................................................................... 11-57 Figure 11-56 Channel Check dialog box ........................................................................................................ 11-58 Figure 11-57 ARFCN Display dialog box ...................................................................................................... 11-59 Figure 11-58 Frequency Analysis menu ......................................................................................................... 11-60 Figure 11-59 Hopping report object setting dialog box.................................................................................. 11-61 Figure 11-60 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format......................................................................... 11-62 Figure 11-61 Browse For Folder .................................................................................................................... 11-63 Figure 11-62 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu ..................................................................................... 11-64 Figure 11-63 Unidirectional neighbor check result ........................................................................................ 11-65 Figure 11-64 Neighbor Analysis menu........................................................................................................... 11-66 Figure 11-65 Neighbors relation effect........................................................................................................... 11-67 Figure 11-66 Add Bidirectional Neighbors .................................................................................................... 11-68 Figure 11-67 Import Neighbor File menu....................................................................................................... 11-70 Figure 11-68 Neighbor Analysis menu........................................................................................................... 11-71 Figure 11-69 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ................................................ 11-72 Figure 11-70 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import dialog box................................................. 11-73 Figure 11-71 Export Neighbors menu ............................................................................................................ 11-74 Figure 11-72 Export Neighbors dialog box .................................................................................................... 11-74 Figure 11-73 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format.................................................................. 11-75
xxii
Figures
Figure 11-74 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format ...................................................................... 11-76 Figure 11-75 Clear Config. Neighbors menu ................................................................................................. 11-77 Figure 11-76 Confirmation box ...................................................................................................................... 11-77 Figure 11-77 Clear Planned Neighbors menu................................................................................................. 11-78 Figure 11-78 Confirmation box ...................................................................................................................... 11-78 Figure 11-79 Redundant Neighbor cell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box............................................................ 11-79 Figure 11-80 Measurement Report Analysis command.................................................................................. 11-81 Figure 11-81 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box ................................................................................ 11-82 Figure 11-82 CarrierAnalyReport................................................................................................................... 11-84 Figure 11-83 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) dialog box ........................... 11-86 Figure 11-84 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box..................................................................................... 11-88 Figure 11-85 Analysis Setting menu............................................................................................................... 11-89 Figure 11-86 Setting dialog box ..................................................................................................................... 11-90 Figure 11-87 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box ....................................... 11-91 Figure 11-88 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box................................. 11-92 Figure 11-89 Trouble Shooting menu............................................................................................................. 11-94 Figure 11-90 UL Interference Analysis dialog box......................................................................................... 11-95 Figure 11-91 Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box ..................................... 11-96 Figure 11-92 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box ..................................................................... 11-97 Figure 11-93 There is no data ......................................................................................................................... 11-97 Figure 12-1 Network Expansion Report command ..........................................................................................12-3 Figure 12-2 Network Expansion Report dialog box.........................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box..........................................12-5 Figure 12-4 Network Expansion Report...........................................................................................................12-6 Figure 12-5 Network Expansion Report in OWC mode...................................................................................12-7 Figure 12-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command ....................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box...............................................................................................12-9 Figure 12-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box ..................................... 12-11 Figure 12-9 LAC Capacity report...................................................................................................................12-13 Figure 12-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box................................................................................12-15 Figure 12-11 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box ........................................................................................12-16 Figure 12-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box ..........................................................................................12-18 Figure 12-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box.....................................................................................12-19
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xxiii
Figures
Figure 13-1 License Error dialog box...............................................................................................................13-3 Figure 13-2 Open dialog box............................................................................................................................13-4 Figure 13-3 License information ......................................................................................................................13-5 Figure 13-4 Input performance data error ........................................................................................................13-8 Figure 13-5 Network information dialog box...................................................................................................13-8 Figure 13-6 Problem hint dialog box................................................................................................................13-9 Figure 13-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check .....................................................................................13-12 Figure 13-8 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check .........................................................13-13 Figure 13-9 Site View.....................................................................................................................................13-14 Figure 13-10 Show Items Option dialog box .................................................................................................13-19 Figure 13-11 Case of a too large displaying area............................................................................................13-20 Figure 13-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected........................................................................13-21 Figure 13-13 Export Neighbors command .....................................................................................................13-22 Figure 13-14 Export Neighbors dialog box....................................................................................................13-23 Figure 13-15 Neighbor Analysis menu...........................................................................................................13-23 Figure 13-16 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box ................................................13-24 Figure 13-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box ............................................13-25 Figure 13-18 Output dialog box .....................................................................................................................13-26 Figure 13-19 Open dialog box........................................................................................................................13-27 Figure 13-20 Select Table dialog box.............................................................................................................13-27 Figure 13-21 Import Setup dialog box ...........................................................................................................13-28
xxiv
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Data collection methods for different types of NEs............................................................................1-3 Table 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000) ..........................................1-6 Table 1-3 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM).............................................1-8 Table 1-4 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM..................................................................1-9 Table 1-5 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM................................................................ 1-11 Table 1-6 Supported NE versions .....................................................................................................................1-12 Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version ................................................................2-3 Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition ............................................................................................2-4 Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server .............................................................................................2-9 Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog box......................................................................................2-19 Table 2-5 Structure of the directory ..................................................................................................................2-41 Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI ..................................................................................................3-3 Table 3-2 Description of the View menu ............................................................................................................3-8 Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu...........................................................................................................3-10 Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar ............................................................................3-10 Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimization toolbar ............................................................................ 3-11 Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar.................................................................................................3-12 Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar ............................................................................................3-13 Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata...........................................................................................3-22 Table 3-9 Description of the View menu ..........................................................................................................3-24 Table 3-10 Description of the Tool menu .........................................................................................................3-24 Table 3-11 Description of the Help menu .........................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-12 Icons on the toolbar ........................................................................................................................3-26 Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box...................................................................................................4-4 Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Information dialog box...............................................................................4-7 Table 5-1 Data sources........................................................................................................................................5-9
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xxv
Tables
GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM .......................................................................................5-10 Table 5-3 Importing configuration parameter mode .........................................................................................5-12 Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement ..................................................................................5-12 Table 5-5 Description of the result of comparing project parameters...............................................................5-32 Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box ...........5-45 Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page .................................................................5-46 Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report .................................................................5-51 Table 5-9 Options on the shortcut menu ...........................................................................................................5-54 Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar................................................................................................5-66 Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar.......................................................................................................................5-102 Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart...................................................................................5-104 Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box ...........................................................................................6-14 Table 7-1 Information about the database versions of the BSC and Nastar........................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Description of each configuration item entered for automatic neighboring cell optimization............7-7 Table 8-1 Versions of the BSC and the M2000...................................................................................................8-2 Table 8-2 Parameter description of each configuration item ..............................................................................8-7 Table 9-1 Alarm condition setting symbol..........................................................................................................9-5 Table 9-2 Checking alarm messages.................................................................................................................9-20 Table 9-3 Description of fields .........................................................................................................................9-35 Table 10-1 Functions of the buttons .................................................................................................................10-5 Table 10-2 Settings and functions...................................................................................................................10-10 Table 10-3 Description of the Setting tab page...............................................................................................10-14 Table 10-4 Element on the Setting tab page ...................................................................................................10-27 Table 10-5 TopN .............................................................................................................................................10-44 Table 10-6 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report......................................................................................10-47 Table 10-7 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report .................................................................................10-48 Table 10-8 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report .................................................................................10-49 Table 10-9 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog box...............................................................10-52 Table 10-10 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report ...............................................................................10-53 Table 10-11 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report...........................................................................10-55 Table 10-12 Function of each sheet in Compare Report.................................................................................10-57 Table 10-13 Sheets in the swap comparison report.........................................................................................10-61 Table 10-14 Output setting of the report.........................................................................................................10-64
xxvi
Tables
Table 11-1 Description of configuration analysis ............................................................................................. 11-2 Table 11-2 Frequency band and range .............................................................................................................. 11-6 Table 11-3 Description of the Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box.................................. 11-13 Table 11-4 The range of frequency point and their corresponding frequency band........................................ 11-45 Table 11-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box ............................................................................ 11-59 Table 11-6 Description of Time and Object Setting tab page ......................................................................... 11-83 Table 11-7 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box........................................................... 11-89 Table 11-8 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box ............. 11-93 Table 11-9 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box ........................ 11-95 Table 12-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog box .............12-4 Table 12-2 Description of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box...................................................................12-9 Table 12-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box ......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-11 Table 13-1 Process procedure ...........................................................................................................................13-6 Table 13-2 Calculation formula of non-original (BSC 32) .............................................................................13-17 Table 13-3 Handover success rate ..................................................................................................................13-29 Table 14-1 Abbreviations..................................................................................................................................14-1
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
xxvii
1 Overview
1
About This Chapter
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Section 1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM Describes 1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM
Overview
The software architecture, networking mode, software configuration, workflow, and NE versions of the Nastar GSM. The applications of the Nastar GSM.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-1
1 Overview
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM

1.1.1 Overview
Developed independently by Huawei, the GENEX Nastar GSM is an integrated network optimization tool that can be applied to the GSM BSS 9000/1800 system. Based on the OMC-R performance data, configuration data, and project parameters, the Nastar GSM analyzes the GSM BSS network and exports analysis results in the following formats:

Chart Report Map
The Nastar GSM provides the following functions:

Monitoring the network status Analyzing the network quality Locating problematic areas
In this way, the Nastar GSM helps to improve the efficiency of network optimization engineers and satisfy customer's further demands on quality of service (QoS). The Nastar GSM consists of two versions:
Server/ client mode For details, see section 1.1.4 "Server/Client Mode." Stand-alone mode For details, see section 1.1.5 "Stand-Alone Mode."
The physical architecture and the software configuration for the server / client mode and the stand-alone mode are different.
1.1.2 Software Structure

The Nastar GSM comprises the following modules:

Data collection module Import data module Client
Data Collection Module

The data collection module provides the following functions:
Supporting manual and automatic collection of the following data:

Configuration data of the BSC32, BSC6000, and packet control unit (PCU) Performance data Call history record (CHR) data

Filtering and compressing all types of data Uploading the data to the performance Nastar server (PNS)
1-2
1 Overview
You can use different methods to collect data from different NEs. Table 1-1 describes the data collection methods and the location from which the data is obtained. Table 1-1 Data collection methods for different types of NEs NE Data Collection Tool Data collection tool Installation Location PNS Data Obtaining Location M2000 Function
BSC6000
Obtaining the configuration data and performance data of the BSC6000 from the specified directory of the M2000
BSC32
Dynamic performance data convert tool (NAConvert)
BAM
BAM
Extracting the latest performance data from the back administration module (BAM) at regular intervals Uploading the converted data to the performance server through the file transfer protocol (FTP) Extracting partial performance data from the original performance files of the BSC32 Generating specified result files
Time-segment-based performance data extract tool (StatTrans)
BAM
BAM
The size of the BSC32 performance files is decreased after being segmented. PCU Data collection tool PNS BAM Obtaining the configuration and performance data of the PCU from the appointed directory of the PCU
Data Import Module

The Transdata is a data import module in the Nastar GSM. The Transdata imports the following data to the SQL Server:

Performance data Base station controller (BSC) configuration data Packet control unit (PCU) configuration data
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-3
1 Overview
The Transdata also provides the following functions:

Viewing the result of performance registration Displaying the information about the current database Backing up current task information
Client
The client supports the analysis of performance data and consists of the following modules:

Platform module Performance monitoring module Intelligent report module Basic analysis module Senior analysis module Operation decision module
1.1.3 Networking Mode

The Nastar GSM system comprises data collection servers, PNSs, and Nastar clients. The entities use the TCP/IP protocol to be connected through a local area network (LAN). Based on the FTP protocol, the following modules transmit files between each other:

Nastar collection server and M2000 Nastar collection server and PNS
The Nastar GSM can collect data from the M2000 or the BAM server. Therefore, the networking mode is categorized into two types.
1-4
1 Overview
Collecting Data from the M2000

If the Huawei BSC6000 and Huawei M2000 are used on a network, the data collection server collects the network optimization data from the M2000 server. Figure 1-1 shows the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000). Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000)
Client Collection server PNS LAN Client Client
M2000 Intranet
BSC
BAM
BSC
BAM
BSC
BAM
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-5
1 Overview
Table 1-2 describes the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000). Table 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000) Scenario Description Number of Data Collection Servers On commercial GSM networks, the M2000 manages all the NEs in the BSC6000. The network optimization data is stored in the M2000.
On the BSS network where the M2000 manages all the NEs, the number of collection servers is the same as the number of the M2000 servers. If the M2000 is configured in part of the BSS network, the number of collection servers is the sum of the number of the M2000 servers and the equipment rooms where the BAM is located.
Placing the Collection Server Security Plan of the PNS
Huawei recommends that you place the collection server and PNS in the same equipment room. In this way, you can configure, manage, and upgrade the collection server conveniently.
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access list of the M2000 firewall. Thus, the collection server can collect the optimization data from the M2000. The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access list of the firewall in the PNS. Thus, the collection server can upload the collected optimization data to the PNS. If the PNS and the M2000 are located on different network segments, the collection server should be configured with double network cards. If the PNS and the M2000 are located on the same network segment, a network card is configured to the collection server. The collection server downloads data from the M2000. The collection server uploads data to the PNS. The FTP service should be installed and started in the M2000 and PNS. For the original network optimization data stored in the M2000, you can set the storage period to 5-10 days. If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are not integrated in one physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on network optimization in one BSC to 3-6 months. If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are integrated in one physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on network optimization in one BSC to 1-3 months. The PNS does not store the original network optimization data.
Interconnection Mode

Storing the Network Optimization Data
Advantage, Disadvantage, and Limitation
The planning of the networking mode is clear and distinct. The Nastar collection server and analysis server are placed together. In this way, you can manage them conveniently. You can obtain the performance data of the BTS through the M2000.
1-6
1 Overview
Collecting Data from the BAM

If the Huawei BSC30 or Huawei PCU is used on a network, the data collection server collects the network optimization data from the BAM server. Figure 1-2 shows the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM). Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)
Area A BSC BAM Collection Collect Server server
BSC
BAM
Intranet
PNS
LAN
BSC
BAM
Collection Collect Server server
Area B
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-7
1 Overview
Table 1-3 describes the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM). Table 1-3 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM) Scenario Description Number of Configured Collection Servers Placing the Collection Server If the Huawei BSC32 or Huawei PCU is used on a network, the network optimization data is stored in each BAM. One collection server is required for the equipment room where the BAM is placed. If multiple BAMs are placed in one equipment room, only one collection server is required for the equipment room. The collection server and BAM should be placed in the same equipment room. If they are not placed in the same equipment room, the rooms where they are placed should be located on the same network segment.
Security Plan of the Servers
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access list of the BAM firewall. Thus, the collection server can collect the optimization data from the BAM. The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access list of the firewall in the PNS. Thus, the collection server can upload the collected optimization data to the PNS. If the PNS and the BAM are located on different network segments, the collection server should be configured with double network cards. If the PNS and the BAM are located on the same network segment, a network card is configured to the collection server. The collection server downloads data from the BAM. The collection server uploads data to the PNS. The FTP service should be installed and started in the BAM and PNS. If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are not integrated in one physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on network optimization in one BSC to three months. If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are integrated in one physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on network optimization in one BSC to one month. The PNS does not store the original network optimization data.
Interconnection Mode

Storing the Network Optimization Data
1-8
1 Overview
1.1.4 Server/Client Mode

The Nastar GSM server/client mode performs different tasks by using the server and client.

The server imports data and performs public functions, such as the client and management of multiple users. The client analyzes the performance data and generates analysis reports.
The Nastar GSM server and client use different computers or the same computer. When they use different computers, the two computers are connected through the TCP/IP protocol in LAN mode or virtual private network (VPN) mode. The server/client mode in the Nastar GSM comprises the following physical entities:

Data collection server Performance local server (PLS) (optional) PNS Nastar client
Software Configuration
Table 1-4 lists the functions of the software installed on each entity in server/client mode. Table 1-4 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM Entity PLS (optional) Software Configuration SQL Server GENEX Nastar PLS FTP server Data collection server PNS The Nastar data collection tool FTP server Function Storing original CHR data Collecting and preprocessing the CHR data Uploading the pre-processed CHR data to the PNS
Collecting, compressing, and filtering the network optimization data Uploading the data to the FTP server Network optimization data uploaded by the Nastar data collection server and PLS Engineering data uploaded through other means
Acquiring the following data:

Nastar GSM Transdata SQL Server
Importing data from the FTP server to the SQL Server

Storing the network optimization data for the PNS Allowing the Nastar clients to access the data Analyzing the network performance Generating the analysis reports
Nastar client

Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-9
1 Overview
Entity Nastar client
Software Configuration Nastar client
Function

Analyzing the network performance Generating the analysis reports
Workflow
Figure 1-3 shows the workflow of the Nastar GSM in server/client mode. Figure 1-3 Workflow of the Nastar GSM
Data collection M2000/ BAM Data collection server Nastar server Nastar client Data storage Data analysis
Original data Data 1 collection tool FTP server 2 Transdata SQL Server 3 Nastar A Access
Nastar B Nastar C
Access
Access
The workflow of the Nastar GSM is as follows:

Collecting data You can collect the network optimization data by using the data collection tool, or the data collection tool automatically collects the network optimization data. Huawei recommends automatic collection. The PLS collects and preprocesses the CHR data and imports the data to the PNS.
Storing data The data collection tool automatically uploads data to the PNS through the FTP. The Nastar WCDMA Transdata is a data import tool in the PNS. You can start the Transdata and it automatically imports periodic data to the SQL Server on the PNS.
Analyzing data The Nastar client analyzes data. The data is displayed on the PNS or Nastar client.
1-10
1 Overview
1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode

The Nastar GSM can perform the following operations in one workstation in stand-alone mode:

Import data Analyze monitoring reports Generate reports
The Nastar GSM comprises the following physical entities in stand-alone mode:

Data collection server PLS (optional) Nastar stand-alone server (Mini-server)
Comparing with the server/client mode, the stand-alone mode integrates the PNS and Nastar client. The Nastar server, however, is capable of analyzing the data of only one BSC.
Software Configuration
Table 1-5 lists the functions of the software installed on each entity in stand-alone mode. Table 1-5 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM Entity PLS (optional) Software Configuration SQL Server GENEX Nastar PLS FTP server Data collection server The Nastar data collection tool or NAConvert Function Storing original CHR data Collecting and pre-processing the CHR data Uploading the pre-processed CHR data to the PNS
Collecting, compressing, and filtering the network optimization data Uploading the data to the FTP server
For the versions earlier than the G3BSC32V300R008C01, the NAConvert is used to collect data
Nastar stand-alone server
FTP server
Acquiring the following data:

Network optimization data uploaded by the Nastar data collecting server and PLS Engineering data uploaded through other means
Nastar GSM Transdata Microsoft SQL Server desktop engine (MSDE)
Importing data from the FTP server to the SQL Server

Storing the data imported from the FTP server Permitting data access for the Nastar client
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-11
1 Overview
Entity
Software Configuration Nastar client
Function

Analyzing the network performance Generating the analysis reports
Workflow
The Nastar GSM workflow in stand-alone mode is similar to the workflow in server/client mode. For details about the workflow, refer to Figure 1-3. In stand-alone mode, the Nastar GSM is not configured with a Nastar client. The Nastar GSM stand-alone server functions as the PNS plus the Nastar client.
The server/client mode and stand-alone mode use the same Nastar GSM installation packet. You can choose to install the version you need during installing the Nastar GSM. You can differentiate the server version from the stand-alone version through the dongle authority.
1.1.6 NE Version
Table 1-6 lists the network element (NE) versions supported by the Nastar GSM V200R005. Table 1-6 Supported NE versions Supported Object BSC32 Product Version G3BSC32V300R002C10 G3BSC32V300R002C11 G3BSC32V300R002C12 G3BSC32V300R002C13 G3BSC32V300R006C01 G3BSC32V300R006C02 G3BSC32V300R007C01 G3BSC32V300R007C02 G3BSC32V300R008C01 BSC6000 BSC6000V900R001C01B066 BSC6000V900R001C02B084 BSC6000V900R001C03B104 BSC6000V900R001C04B032 BSC6000V900R001C04B061 BSC6000V900R003C01B032 BSC6000V900R003C01B061
1-12
1 Overview
Supported Object
Product Version BSC6000V900R003C01B070 BSC6000V900R008C01B046 BSC6000V900R008C01B048
PCU
G3PCUV300R005C05 G3PCUV300R008C01 G3PCUV300R008C02
1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM

1.2.1 Application Scenarios
The Nastar GSM is intended for network O&M engineers and network optimization engineers from operators. The Nastar GSM is applied to the following scenarios:
Routine network monitoring The Nastar can periodically generate periodical reports on network monitoring. You can monitor the performance of networks by analyzing the reports.
Analyzing and problem locating To locate problems or analyze network performance or trend, you can connect the desktop or portable PCs that are installed with the Nastar GSM client to the PNS.
1.2.2 Application Modes

The application modes of the Nastar GSM are as follows:
Local In this mode, you need not install the SQL Server. You can use the provided network planning or optimization-related functions. The performance-related functions, however, cannot be used.
Online In this mode, you need to install the SQL Server. You can use all the provided performance-related analysis functions. All traffic statistic data and analysis data is saved on the local computer.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
1-13
2
About This Chapter
Section
Installation of the Nastar GSM
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes The installation requirements for users and the procedures for installing the GENEX Nastar GSM. The preparations for the installation of the Nastar GSM. The installation and the configuration of the Nastar GSM and related software. The structure of the installation directory of the Nastar GSM. The procedures for uninstalling the Nastar GSM. The introduction of license management.
2.1 Introduction to the Installation 2.2 Preparing the PNS 2.3 Installing the Related Software 2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory 2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM 2.6 License Management
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Installation

2.1.1 Requirements for User
The installation personnel must familiarize themselves with the basic operations of a personal computer (PC), such as the operations on the Windows 2000 or Windows XP, and Office 2007.
2.1.2 Flow Chart

Figure 2-1 shows the flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM. Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM
Installing SQL Server/MSDE
Installing GENEX Shared component
Installing Nastar GSM
Installing successfully
The SQL Server is installed on the PNS, and the Microsoft SQL-Serve desktop engine (MSDE) is installed on the stand-alone server of the Nastar GSM.
2-2
2.2 Preparing the PNS

2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server
Configuration of the Server/Client Mode
The configuration of the Nastar GSM system is based on the number of cells. In server/client mode, when the number of cells is fewer than 2,000, or when the number of carriers is fewer than 5,000, the recommended configuration of the Nastar GSM is listed in Table 2-1. Every 2,000 cells or 5,000 carriers require a PNS. Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version Configuration Object Data collection server Configuration Item Hardware configuration Configuration

PC server CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.2 GHz or faster Memory: 1 GB Hard disk: 2 x 146 GB redundant array of inexpensive disks (RAID1)
Operating system PLS Hardware configuration
Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP Professional / Windows 2003

PC server CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.6 GHz or faster Memory: 4 GB (4 x 1 GB) Hard disk: 3 x 146 GB (SCSI, RAID 0)
Operating system Database FTP server PNS Hardware configuration
Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition Server-U2.0/ISS 5.0 Edition or later

PC server CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.6 GHz or faster Memory: 4 GB (4 x 1 GB) Hard disk: 4 x 146 GB (SCSI, RAID 0) Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2003
Operating system Database

Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Enterprise Edition
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-3
Configuration Object Nastar client
Configuration Item Hardware configuration
Configuration

PC CPU: 2.4 GHz Memory: 512 MB Hard disk: 40 GB Monitor VGA: 1024 x 768, 16-bit color or higher Port: one parallel port or USB port to connect the dongle
Operating system Office software
Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP Professional Microsoft Office 2003
The number of users connected to the operating system of the PNS must be the same as the number of users connected to the database. When the SQL Server is Enterprise Edition, the operating system must be the Enterprise Edition.
Configuration of the Stand-Alone Edition

Table 2-2 describes the configuration of the Nastar GSM system with stand-alone. Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition Configuration Type Recommended configuration Configuration Item Hardware configuration Configuration Requirement

CPU: Pentium IV 2 GHz or faster Memory: 512 MB Hard disk: 40 GB Monitor: VGA, 1024 x 768, 16-bit colors or above Port: at least one parallel port or USB port to connect the dongle Windows NT4.0 or higher Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows 2003
Operating system

Database Office software
MSDE, SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Microsoft Office 2003
2-4
Configuration Type Minimum configuration
Configuration Item Hardware configuration
Configuration Requirement

CPU: Pentium III 800 MHz Memory: 256 MB Hard disk: 10 GB spare disk space Display: VGA; 1024x768, 16-bit colors or higher Port: at least one parallel port or USB port to connect the dongle Windows NT4.0 or higher Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows 2003
Operating system

Database Office Software
MSDE, SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Microsoft Office 2003
2.2.2 Checking the System Environment

Checking the System Configuration
The Excel component of Microsoft Office must be installed on the PNS or client. Before installing the Nastar GSM, check whether the Microsoft Office, especially the Microsoft Excel, is installed on the client. If the Microsoft Office is not installed on the client, install the Microsoft Office before you install the Nastar GSM.
Checking Network Environment

Before installing the Nastar GSM, you need to check the network environment and set the IP address of the client based on the network segments provided by the operator.
If the network segment and IP address are not available, contact the O&M personnel of the operator. Ensure that the IP address to be specified is unique on the network segments. Otherwise, an IP conflict occurs. To check network environment, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose start > Settings > Control Panel. Step 2 Double-click Network Connections. Step 3 Double-click Local Area Connection.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-5
The Local Area Connection Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box
2-6
Step 4 Click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-7
Step 5 On the General tab page, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-4. Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box
Step 6 Enter an IP address. The input IP address and the IP addresses of the BSC and the BAM must belong to the same network segment. Step 7 Click OK. ----End
2-8
2.3 Installing the Related Software

2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server
Installing Description
You can choose to install the SQL Server or install only the MSDE. The MSDE is recommended for the stand-alone version. If multiple users share the network at the same time, the SQL Server is recommended. This document takes the installation of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition as an example. This section introduces the installation of the SQL Server. For details, refer to the online help of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000.
Preparations
Before installing the SQL Server 2000, you need to perform the following operations:
Select an installation edition At present, the database of the PNS is SQL Server 2000 and Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Service Pack 4. The installation edition depends on the operating system. Table 2-3 lists the operating systems and corresponding SQL Server editions.
Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server Operating System Windows XP Windows 2000 SQL Server Edition SQL Server 2000 Personal Edition SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition

Log in to the system as the user who has administrative rights to the system Ensure that all services related to the SQL Server and open database connectivity (ODBC) are closed. Ensure that the event examiner and register table examiner, that is, regedit.exe or regedt32.exe, are closed. Ensure sure that the Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or a later version is installed.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-9
Procedures
To install the SQL Server, perform the following steps: Step 1 Insert the installation CD of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition. If the installation packet is autorun, the initial installation interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-5. If the installation packet is not autorun, run the installation file. Figure 2-5 Initial installation interface
2-10
Step 2 Click SQL Server 2000 Components. The Installation type selection window is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 Installation type selection screen
Step 3 Click Install Database Server. The Setup progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-11
After the InstallShield Wizard is prepared, the Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8 Welcome dialog box
2-12
Step 4 Click Next. The Computer Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9. Figure 2-9 Computer Name dialog box
Step 5 Based on actual requirements, perform the following settings in the Computer Name dialog box:
Local Computer Local Computer is selected by default. The name of the local computer is shown in the text box. Select Local Computer if you plan to install the SQL Server on a local computer.
Remote Computer Select Remote Computer for remote installation. Type a computer name, or click Browse to select a remote computer.
Virtual Server The Virtual Server is selected when a cluster is detected.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-13
Step 6 Click Next. The Installation Selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog box
2-14
Step 7 In the Installation Selection dialog box, select Create a new instance of the SQL Server, or install Client Tools, and then click Next. The User Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-11. Figure 2-11 User Information dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-15
Step 8 Type the name and company name, and then click Next. The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-12. Figure 2-12 Software License Agreement dialog box
2-16
Step 9 Click Yes. The CD-Key dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-13. Figure 2-13 CD-Key dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-17
Step 10 Enter the correct CD key, and then click Next. The Installation Definition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-14. Figure 2-14 Installation Definition dialog box
2-18
Step 11 Select Server and Client Tools, and then click Next. The Instance Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-15. Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box
Step 12 In the Instance Name dialog box, set the item based on Table 2-4. Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog box If You select Default You can infer that you can install the default instance or name an instance. Operation
To install the default instance, select Default, and then click Next. To name an instance, clear the Default checkbox. Type a new name in Instance name, and then click Next.
You do not select Default
the default instance already exists, and you can name only the instance.
Enter a new instance name in the Instance name field, and then click Next.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-19
The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-16. Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog box
Step 13 Perform the following operations in the Setup Type dialog box: 1. 2. Select Typical, Minimum or Custom. In the Destination Folder area, click Browse, and then set the target path of Program Files and Data Files to C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server.
2-20
3.
Click Next. The Select Components dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Select Components dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-21
Step 14 Click Next. To ensure normal operation of the system, the default configuration is recommended. Figure 2-18 shows the Services Accounts dialog box. Figure 2-18 Services Accounts dialog box
Step 15 Set the SQL Server services accounts in the Service Accounts dialog box.

If you select Use the same account for each service. Auto start SQL Server Service, you can log in to the server and client as the same user account. If you select Customize the setting for each service, you need to set different login account for the server and client.
You can select Use the Local System account or Use a Domain User account in the Service Setting area, which is used to bind the SQL Server. Selecting Use the Local System account is recommended.
2-22
Step 16 Click Next. The Authentication Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-19. Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode
Step 17 You can select Windows Authentication Mode or Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication) in the Authentication Mode dialog box.
If you select Windows Authentication Mode, the user name and password of Windows is required when the client logs in to the server. You can set the users and passwords in Control Panel of Windows. If you select Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication), you can use the user name and password of the Windows, and the user name and password set for SQL Server, for example, administrator sa.
The Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication) is recommended.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-23
Step 18 Click Next. The Collation Settings dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-20. Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog box
Step 19 Select Collation designator, and then select Chinese_PRC from the drop-down list. Under Sort order, use the default value.
If an English edition is installed, select LATIN1-GENERAL from the drop-down list.
2-24
Step 20 Click Next. The Network Libraries dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-21. Figure 2-21 Network Libraries dialog box
Step 21 Select Name Pipes and TCP/IP Sockets. Set Name Pipes to \\.\pipe\sql\query and set Port number in TCP/IP Sockets to 1433.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-25
Step 22 Click Next. The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-22. Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box
2-26
Step 23 Ensure that all information is set correctly, and then click Next. The Choose Licensing Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-23. Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-27
Step 24 In the Choose Licensing Mode dialog box, click Per Seat for, and then enter the corresponding number of devices. Click Continue. After the setup is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-24. Figure 2-24 Setup Complete dialog box
Step 25 Click Finish, and then restart the computer. ----End
The installation program of the SQL Server is case insensitive.
2-28
2.3.2 Installing the MSDE

To install the MSDE, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click setup.exe. The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-25. Figure 2-25 Welcome dialog box
Step 2 Click Next. The system starts to install the MSDE, as shown in Figure 2-26. Figure 2-26 Installation progress bar
Step 3 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-29
The setup.ini configuration file in the installation directory of the MSDE has an option, that is, INSTANCENAME. The option refers to the name of an instance and the default value is GENEX. When reinstalling the MSDE, you can choose not to uninstall the existing MSDE instance. In this case, you must specify a different instance name, that is, you need to add an SQL application instance. If you plan to use the existing MSDE instance name, you need to uninstall the service program related to the instance name. The MSDE does not delete the instance file in the path of the Microsoft SQL Server. For example, the MSSQL$GENEX folder in the path C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server is not deleted. You need to delete the instance file before you reinstall the Nastar. Thus, uninstalling the MSDE is not recommended.
2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Components

To install the GENEX Shared components, perform the following steps: Step 1 Open the GENEX Shared. Double-click setup.exe. The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-27. Figure 2-27 Welcome dialog box
2-30
Step 2 Click Next. The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-28. Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-31
Step 3 Click Yes. The Setup Status progress dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-29. Figure 2-29 Setup Status progress dialog box
2-32
After the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-30. Figure 2-30 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box
Step 4 Click Finish, and then restart the computer. ----End
2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM

To install the Nastar GSM, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click setup.exe in the Nastar GSM installation packet. The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-31.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-33
Figure 2-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box
2-34
Step 2 Click Next. The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-32. Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog box
Step 3 Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next. The Customer Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-33.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-35
Figure 2-33 Customer Information dialog box
Step 4 Type the user information in the User Name and Company Name fields. Step 5 Select the associated options according to your requirements.

If you allow anyone to use this software, select Anyone who uses this computer (all users). If only you can use this software, select Only for me.
Step 6 Click Next. The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-34.
2-36
Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog box
Step 7 Choose the setup type in the Setup Type dialog box:
Stand-alone Edition If Stand-alone Edition is selected, the MSDE is required. Server Edition If Server Edition is selected, the MSDE is optional.
Step 8 Click Next.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-37
The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-35. Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box
If the network environment is not available, or you can install only the MSDE to save the system resources, installing the stand-alone edition is recommended. If a stable network is available, installing the server edition and the SQL Server is recommended. The SQL Server provides you with better performance services.
2-38
Step 9 Specify an installation path, and then click Next. The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-36. Figure 2-36 Select Program Folder dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-39
Step 10 Click Next. The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-37. Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box
2-40
After the installation is complete, the Maintenance Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-38. Figure 2-38 Maintenance Complete dialog box
Step 11 Click Finish. ----End
If the Microsoft Office, GENEX Shared components, and the MSDE are not installed on a computer, the system prompts you to install them. The Excel component is mandatory. When upgrading the system, you need not install the GENEX Shared and MSDE again.
2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory

A complete installation directory includes the Nastar GSM, GENEX Shared common installation packet, and the MSDE. Table 2-5 describes the structure of the installation directory. Table 2-5 Structure of the directory Directory Nastar bin Antenna Description Antenna file
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-41
Directory GSM Autorun Database CHS Eng License NEBDLL Project Runtime AlarmVoice Template Tool Transdata StatTrans Chs Eng Runtime LICENSE GENEX Shared MSDE2000
Description Autorun file Access database file Chinese directory of the task template English directory of the task template User authorization file Import and export file of neighbor scripts Storing the project template file Log files created when run Nastar Storing AlamVoice file Storing the report template file Data incising tool Chinese script directory English script directory Log files created when run Transdata User authentication file GENEX Shared components Microsoft desktop engine
2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM

2.5.1 Flow Chart
Figure 2-39 shows the flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM.
2-42
Figure 2-39 Flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM
2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Components

To uninstall the GENEX Shared component, perform the following steps: Step 1 Open the Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-43
The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-40. Figure 2-40 Add or Remove Programs dialog box
Step 2 Select Shared, and then click Change or Remove. The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-41.
2-44
Figure 2-41 Welcome dialog box
Step 3 Select Remove in the Welcome dialog box. Step 4 Click Next. The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-42. Figure 2-42 Confirm Uninstall dialog box
Step 5 Click OK. After the shared component is uninstalled, the Uninstall Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-43.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-45
Figure 2-43 Uninstall Complete dialog box
2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM

To Uninstall the GENEX GSM, perform the following steps: Step 1 Open Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.
2-46
The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-44. Figure 2-44 Uninstalling the GENEX GSM dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-47
Step 2 Select GENEX Nastar GSM, and then click Remove. The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-45. Figure 2-45 Welcome dialog box
Step 3 Select Remove, and then click Next. The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-46. Figure 2-46 Confirm Uninstall dialog box
Step 4 Click OK. After the GENEX Nastar GSM is uninstalled, the Uninstall Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-47.
2-48
Figure 2-47 Uninstall Complete dialog box
2.6 License Management

2.6.1 Installing the Dongle
When the Nastar GSM is installed completely, you need to install the dongle. To install the dongle, perform the following steps: Step 1 Insert the attached dongle drive into the CD-ROM, and then install the dongle drive. Step 2 Insert the dongle into the parallel port. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
2-49
2.6.2 Updating the License

To update the license, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Help > Update License from the menu bar of the Nastar GSM graphical user interface (GUI). The Open dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select a valid license file from the dialog box. Step 3 Click Open. ----End
2-50
3 GUI
3
About This Chapter
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Section 3.1 Nastar GSM GUI 3.2 GUI of the Transdata Describes
GUI
The introduction to the GUI of the GENEX Nastar GSM. The introduction to the GUI of the GENEX Nastar Transdata.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-1
3 GUI
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI

3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI
Choose start > All Programs > GENEX Nastar > Nastar GSM. The GENEX Nastar GSM GUI is displayed. The main interface consists of the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, workspace window, display window, attribute window, and status bar. Figure 3-1 shows the GUI of the Nastar GSM. Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM
3-2
3 GUI
Table 3-1 describes each item in Nastar GSM GUI. Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Title bar Workspace window Menu bar Toolbar Display window Property window Status bar
3.1.2 Menu Bar

As shown in Figure 3-2, the menu bar comprises Project, Frequency Analysis, Neighbors Analysis, Analysis Reports, Geographic Display, View, Window, and Help. Figure 3-2 Menu bar
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-3
3 GUI
Project Menu
Figure 3-3 shows the submenus of the Project menu. Figure 3-3 Submenus of the Project menu
3-4
3 GUI
Frequency Analysis Menu

Figure 3-4 shows the submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu. Figure 3-4 Submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu
Neighbors Analysis Menu

Figure 3-5shows the submenus of the Neighbor Analysis menu. Figure 3-5 Submenus of the Neighbors Analysis menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-5
3 GUI
Analysis Reports Menu

Figure 3-6 shows the submenus of the Analysis Reports menu. Figure 3-6 Submenus of the Analysis Reports menu
3-6
3 GUI
Geographic Display Menu

Figure 3-7 shows the submenus of the Geographic Display menu. Figure 3-7 Submenus of the Geographic Display menu
View Menu
Figure 3-8 shows the submenus of the View menu. Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-7
3 GUI
Table 3-2 describes the submenus of the View menu. Table 3-2 Description of the View menu Submenu Toolbar Description Displaying or hiding toolbar If the menu is selected, the toolbar is in the display status and is under the system menu. Status bar Style Display Legend Window Display Site Navigator Displaying or hiding status bar The status bar is on the bottom of the main window. Selecting the window style Displaying or hiding legend window The legend window lies on the top of the property window. Displaying or hiding site navigator The site navigator lies between the workspace and display window. Display Workspace Display Property Sheet Displaying or hiding workspace The workspace displays the function structure of the system. Displaying or hiding property sheet The property sheet lies on the right of the main window.
Window Menu
The Window menu manages the arrangement style of submenus. Figure 3-9 shows the submenus of the Window menu.
3-8
3 GUI
Figure 3-9 Submenus of the Window menu
Help Menu
The Help menu helps you to learn the software knowledge. Figure 3-10 shows the submenus of the Help menu. Figure 3-10 Help menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-9
3 GUI
Table 3-3 describes the submenus of the Help menu. Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu Submenu Content Index About Nastar Whats New ESN Code License Info Update License Description Helping you to search for instructions on how to use the software Displaying the information such as the version of the GENEX Nastar Displaying the latest information about the GENEX Nastar and after sales service Displaying the electronic serial number (ESN) of the license Displaying the information about license Updating the license when the license is expired
3.1.3 Toolbar
The toolbar comprises the network management, network optimization, map tool and performance toolbar.
Network Management Toolbar

Figure 3-11 shows the Network Management toolbar. Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar
Table 3-4 describes each item of the Network Management toolbar. Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar Item Description Creating a site Editing a site Deleting a site Deleting a cell Searching for a cell
3-10
3 GUI
Network Optimization Toolbar

Figure 3-12 shows the Network Optimization toolbar. Figure 3-12 Network Optimization toolbar
Table 3-5 describes each item in the Network Optimization toolbar. Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimization toolbar Item Description Co-frequency and Co-BSIC check Idle frequency check Spectrum utilization check Co-channel and adjacent channel by ARFCN Co-channel and adjacent channel by cells Displaying neighbors Adding bidirectional neighbors Adding uni-directional neighbors Deleting neighbors Saving neighbors Displaying or hiding reference grid Switching to layer 900 MHZ or 1800 MHz Switching to planning neighbors or configuration neighbors Displaying or hiding workspace Displaying or hiding navigators Displaying or hiding the property sheet Displaying or hiding the legend window
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-11
3 GUI
Map Tool Toolbar

Figure 3-13 shows the Map Tool toolbar. Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar
Table 3-6 describes each item in the Map Tool toolbar. Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar Item Description Moving the map Justifying the map Selecting the map Selecting the map with rectangle Selecting the map with radius Zooming in on the map Zooming out on the map Default scale map Measuring the distance Measuring the angle Setting the layer Scanning the map
Performance Toolbar
Figure 3-14 shows the Performance toolbar. Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar
3-12
3 GUI
Table 3-7 describes each item in the Performance toolbar. Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar Item Description Displaying the network optimization theme Displaying the performance theme
3.1.4 Function Window

The function window is in the right pane of the main window. The function window comprises Network Element, Network Monitor, Network Trend, Performance Alarm, and Trouble Shooting.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-13
3 GUI
NE
Figure 3-15 shows the Network Element pane. Figure 3-15 Network Element pane
NEs are displayed in navigation tree format. You can perform the following operations:

Click an NE, the main window shows a map related to the NE in different colors. Click and select searching type (By Cell Name or By Cell CI). Enter a cell name or cell identity (CI) in the right text box. Figure 3-16 shows the related cell in the NE list.
3-14
3 GUI
Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-15
3 GUI
Routine Network Monitoring

Figure 3-17 shows the navigation tree of routine network monitoring. Figure 3-17 Network Monitor pane
3-16
3 GUI
Network Trend
Figure 3-18 shows the functions in the Network Trend pane. Figure 3-18 Network Trend pane
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-17
3 GUI
Performance Alarm
Figure 3-19 shows the functions of performance alarm. Figure 3-19 Performance Alarm pane
3-18
3 GUI
Trouble Shooting
Figure 3-20 shows the functions in the Trouble Shooting pane. Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-19
3 GUI
3.1.5 Property Window

The Property window is in the right pane of the main window. It displays the map legend and NE property. Figure 3-21 shows the Property window. Figure 3-21 Property window
3-20
3 GUI
3.1.6 Site View

Figure 3-22 shows the Site View window. Figure 3-22 Site View window
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-21
3 GUI
3.2 GUI of the Transdata

3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata
The GUI of the Transdata consists of the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, project view, main view, output view, and status bar. Figure 3-23 shows the GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata. Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata
Table 3-8 describes the GUI of the Transdata. Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Title bar Menu bar Toolbar Main view Output view Status bar Site view
3-22
3 GUI
3.2.2 Menu Bar

The menu bar comprises File, View, Tools, and Help. Figure 3-24 shows the menu bar. Figure 3-24 Menu bar
File Menu
Figure 3-25 shows the File menu. Figure 3-25 File menu
Choose File > Exit to quit the system.
View Menu
Figure 3-26 shows the View menu. Figure 3-26 View menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-23
3 GUI
Table 3-9 describes each item in the View menu of the Transdata. Table 3-9 Description of the View menu Item Toolbar Status bar Workspace bar Open ASSERT file Refresh Description The toolbar is displayed when Toolbar is selected. The status bar is displayed when Status Bar is selected. The workspace bar is displayed when Workspace Bar is selected. The open ASSRT file is displayed when Open ASSRT File is selected. Refresh the interface display
Tools Menu
Figure 3-27 shows the Tools menu. Figure 3-27 Tools menu
Table 3-10describes each item in the Tool menu of the Transdata. Table 3-10 Description of the Tool menu Item Option LogSetting WarningQuery Description The Option box is displayed when Option is selected. The Log Setting box is displayed when LogSetting is selected. The Warning Query box is displayed when WarningQuery is selected
Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-28.
3-24
3 GUI
Figure 3-28 Options dialog box
For details about the Options dialog box, see section 4.3.3 "Statically Importing Performance Data."
Help Menu
Figure 3-29 shows Help menu. Figure 3-29 Help menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-25
3 GUI
Table 3-11 describes each item in Help menu. Table 3-11 Description of the Help menu Item About Transdata ESN code Update license Show license info Description Shows the information about the Transdata. Shows the ESN code. Updates the system license. Shows the information of license.
3.2.3 Toolbar
Figure 3-30 shows the toolbar. Figure 3-30 Toolbar
Table 3-12 describes the icons on the toolbar. Table 3-12 Icons on the toolbar Icon Description Click the icon to enable the ADD NET function. Click the icon to enable the DELETE NET function. Click the icon to enable the ADD BSC or PCU function. Click the icon to enable the DELETE BSC function. Click the icon to enable the DELETE PCU function. Click the icon to enable the option function.
3-26
3 GUI
3.2.4 Project View

Figure 3-31 shows the project view. Figure 3-31 Project view
The information about the network, BSC, and PCU is displayed in the project view. You can operate the data directly.
3.2.5 Main View

Figure 3-32 shows the main view. Figure 3-32 Main view
The main view displays the task information, such as the task name, BSC name, file path, data type, task type, operator, and version. You can use the shortcut menu to operate the task.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
3-27
3 GUI
3.2.6 Output Window

Figure 3-33 shows the output window. Figure 3-33 Output window
The output window displays the procedures for the task operation. You can double-click the window and choose Put in File to save the message in the output window or choose Clear msg list to clear the message.
3-28
4 Using the Transdata
4
About This Chapter
Title 4.1 Basic Operation 4.2 NE Operations 4.3 Data Management 4.4 Task Management 4.5 Drawing Out Data and Importing Data File 4.6 LAN and Remote Network 4.7 Transdata Maintainability Operation
Using the Transdata
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Description The basic operations of the Transdata. The creating, deletion, and upgrade of NEs. The data management of the Transdata. The initialization, backup, and deletion of a task. The drawing out and importing of data file. The exporting and importing of LAN data. The maintainability operations of the Transdata.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-1
4.1 Basic Operation

4.1.1 Starting the SQL Server
Before using the Nastar GSM, you need to install the SQL Server on the server. The server can be either a PC or a laptop. Run Service Manager and start SQL Server Service Manager. Huawei recommends that you select Auto-start service when OS starts in the SQL Server Service Manager dialog box. When you use the MSDE, you need to perform the previous operations.
If SQL Server Service Manager starts successfully, the database status prompt icon is displayed in the Windows task bar. If the SQL Server runs as a system service in the background, check the status of the SQL Server Service Manager. If you do not use the service manager, the database status prompt icon is not displayed in task bar.
Figure 4-1 shows the SQL Server Service Manager dialog box. Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog box
The system does not support the import from a remote server. The remote import indicates that the Transdata accesses the SQL Server through the LAN and imports data.
4.1.2 Starting the Transdata

Background
The Transdata is a data import module, which imports the performance data, BSC configuration data, and PCU configuration data to the SQL Server database. The Transdata also provides the following functions:

Enabling you to view the result of the registration of performance data Displaying the information about the current database
4-2

Backing up the current task information
Procedures
To start the Transdata, perform the following steps: Step 1 Run the Transdata.exe file. The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2. Figure 4-2 Login dialog box
Step 2 Click Option. The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3 Figure 4-3 Login dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-3
Table 4-1 describes the elements in the Login dialog box. Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box Element User Name Password Remember Password Nastar Server Description Enter the user name. Enter the password. If you select Remember Password, you need not enter the user name and password next time. Enter the name of the SQL Server and service name. The server name can be the computer name or the IP address of the server.
In stand-alone mode, you can enter the server name as .\service name. In server mode, you need to enter the server name or IP address\service name. If you select Delete&Clear Database, the Transdata deletes all the local networks and BSCs. If you plan to create a new Nastar database, select Delete&Clear Database. Unexpected errors may happen if you select Delete&Clear Database. Huawei recommends that you should not select this option.
Delete&Clear Database
Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the User Name and Password fields respectively. Step 4 Enter the server name and service name in the Nastar Server field. Step 5 Click OK.
4-4
The main interface of the Transdata is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 Main interface of the Transdata
----End
4.1.3 Closing the Transdata

Background
If the Transdata is started, it can be minimized to the task bar. You can close the Transdata through on the task bar.
Procedures
To close the Transdata, perform the following steps: Step 1 Use either of the following methods to close the Transdata:

Choose File > Exit to close the Transdata. Click in the upper right window to minimize the Transdata, and then right-click on the task bar. The Quit menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Quit menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-5
Choose Quit from the shortcut menu. The Quit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-6. Figure 4-6 Quit dialog box
Step 2 Enter the password in the Password field. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
4.2 NE Operations
4.2.1 Creating a Network
To create a network, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click on the toolbar. You can also right-click GSM, and then choose Add Net from the shortcut menu. The Network Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7.
4-6
Figure 4-7 Network Information dialog box
Table 4-2 describes the elements in the Network Information dialog box. Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Information dialog box Element Radio Network Info Network Name Operator Description Enter the name of the local network. Select an operator from the Operator drop-down list.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-7
Element Database Info Database Name Driver
Description Enter a name for the database. Select a disk letter from the Driver drop-down list. Driver indicates the disk letter on the server instead of on the local disk. If you do not select the disk letter, the default driver is used.
Before importing database to the database server, check whether the selected disk on the server is available.
File Name
The File Name field shows the directory of the database after Database Name and Driver are set. Enter the description of the local network. The Radio Network Description field is optional.
Radio Network Description
Step 2 Type the name of the local network in the Network Name field. Step 3 Select an operator from the Operator drop-down list. Step 4 Click OK. A local network is created. ----End
4.2.2 Creating a BSC

To create a BSC, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click on the toolbar. You can also right-click a network, and then choose Add BSC\PCU from the shortcut menu.
4-8
The Add BSC\PCU dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-8. Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box
Step 2 Click Add. The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-9. Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU
You can create a maximum of four BSCs simultaneously. You can click Add to create one BSC, and then click Delete to delete a BSC.
Step 3 Enter a BSC name in the BSC\PCU Name field.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-9
Step 4 Select the vendor HUAWEIBSC32 from the Vendor drop-down list.
If you select HUAWEIBSC6000 from the Vendor drop-down list, the BSC6000 is created.
Step 5 Select a BSC32 or BSC6000 version from the BSC\PCU Version drop-down list. Step 6 Click OK to create a BSC32 or BSC6000. The created result is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-10. Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32
----End
4-10
Figure 4-11 shows the result of creating the BSC6000. Figure 4-11 Creating BSC6000
If the BSC name is not unique, an information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-12. Figure 4-12 Information dialog box
Step 7 Click OK, and then add a BSC again.

As shown in Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11, you can infer that vendor BSC6000 has three more tasks than BSC32, that is, the Import CHR Data, Delete CHR Data, and Import BSC6000 Freq Data.
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-11
4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC

This task is performed to upgrade the BSC32, BSC6000, and other vendor versions. The PCU is excluded. To upgrade a BSC, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose a BSC in the project view window. Step 2 Right-click the BSC and choose Upgrade BSC from the displayed shortcut menu. The BSC Upgrade dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-13. Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog box
Step 3 Select the version to be upgraded from the Version drop-down list. Click OK to upgrade the BSC version selected. ----End
4.2.4 Deleting a BSC

To delete a BSC, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a BSC, and then choose Delete BSC from the shortcut menu. You can also choose on the toolbar. a BSC, and then click The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-14. Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog box
4-12
Step 2 Click OK. The selected BSC is deleted. ----End
4.2.5 Adding a PCU

To add a PCU in the network, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a network from the project view window. Right-click the selected network, and then choose Add BSC\PCU from the shortcut menu. You can also click on the toolbar.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-13
The Add BSC\PCU dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-15. Figure 4-15 Add BSC\PCU dialog box
Step 2 Click Add. The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16. Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box
Step 3 Enter the PCU name in the BSC\PCU Name field. Step 4 Select HuaweiPCU from the Vendor drop-down list. Step 5 Select a PCU version from the BSC\PCU Version drop-down list. Step 6 Click OK.
4-14

If the PCU is created successfully, the system displays the following message, as shown in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Success load message
If the PCU name already exists, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-18. Figure 4-18 Information dialog box
Step 7 Click OK, and then create a PCU again. ----End
4.2.6 Deleting a PCU

The procedures for deleting a PCU are similar to the procedures for deleting a BSC. To delete a PCU, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a PCU from the NE list in the project view window, and then choose Delete PCU. You can also choose a PCU, and then click on the toolbar. The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-19. Figure 4-19 Confirmation dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-15
Step 2 Click OK. The PCU is deleted. ----End
4.2.7 Deleting a Network

To delete a network, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click an NE from the NE list in project view window, and then choose Del Net from the shortcut menu Figure 4-20 shows the shortcut menu. Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu
You can also choose the NET, and then click
on the toolbar.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-21.
4-16
Figure 4-21 Confirmation dialog box
Step 2 Click OK. ----End
4.2.8 Network Swap

The network swap refers to swapping the network of other vendors for the network of Huawei. If you need to analyze the information about other vendors, the information must be swapped in the Transdata and then is analyzed in the Nastar GSM. To swap cells for Huawei networks, perform the following steps: Step 1 Create an OTHERS network. For details about how to create an OTHERS network, see section 4.2.1 "Creating a Network." Select OTHERS from the Operator drop-down list. Step 2 Create an OTHERS node. For details about how to create an OTHERS node, see section 4.2.2 "Creating a BSC." Select OTHERS from the Vendor drop-down list. Step 3 Choose the data to be swapped under the OTHERS node, and then import the swap data. For details, see section 4.3.1 "Importing BSC Configuration Data." Step 4 Right-click the NE to be swapped for Huawei in the project view window, and then choose Swap Cells to This Net from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-22.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-17
Figure 4-22 Shortcut menu
4-18
The Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-23. Figure 4-23 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box
Step 5 Set parameters in the Swap Cell Configuration setting dialog box. 1. 2. 3. Select an operator to be swapped; Set Cell map file path, Data Setting, and the Cell Match Option; Click OK to complete the data swap from others to Huawei vendor. Figure 4-24 shows the swap success messages. You can click CellMap Setting to set the cell map. Figure 4-24 Swap success messages
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-19
When the system prompts you to match fields, you need to match the fields during network swap. For other fields, choose ItemIndex. to select a data mapping table. The table refers to the .xls file that In the Cell map file field, click comprises the following information:

Cell name of the original vendor The mapping between the LAC and CI of the original vendor and the LAC and CI of Huawei The BSC to which the cell belongs after the network swap
4.3 Data Management

4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data
To import BSC configuration data, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the project view window, select a BSC whose vendor is not the BSC6000. The BSC information on the main view window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-25. Figure 4-25 BSC information
Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import OMC Data row. The button is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Button in the File Path column
4-20
Step 3 Click
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-27. Figure 4-27 Browse for Folder dialog box
Step 4 Select the directory of BSC configuration data. The default file of the BSC32 is .\dbf. Click OK. Step 5 Right-click Import OMC Data and choose Update OMC Data from the shortcut menu. After the data is imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-28. Figure 4-28 Successful import of configuration data
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-21
The procedures for importing the configuration data of vendor BSC6000 are similar.
4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data

To import PCU configuration data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a PCU from the project view window. The PCU information is displayed in the main view window, as shown in Figure 4-29. Figure 4-29 PCU information dialog box
Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import OMC Data row. The button is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 The button in file path
4-22
Step 3 Click
, as shown in Figure 4-30.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-31. Figure 4-31 Browse for Folder
Step 4 Specify a directory for storing the PCU configuration data from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and then click OK. The default file is ".\config.ini". Step 5 Right-click Import OMC Data and choose Import PCU Config Data from the shortcut menu. After the data is imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-32. Figure 4-32 Successful import of configuration data
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-23
You should import the configuration data first. The Import Stat Data function is invalid after you create the PCU. Only when configuration data is imported, you can import the performance data.
4.3.3 Statically Importing Performance Data

Configuring the Import of Performance Data
To configure the import of performance data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-33. Figure 4-33 Options dialog box
Step 2 Type the data cycle time in the Data Cycle field.
4-24
The unit of time is minute. Step 3 If you plan to choose the data that has the same data cycle, select Only Import the same cycle data. Step 4 If you plan to validate the correctness of performance data, select Verify Statistic Data. Step 5 If you plan to set the system to import all data by default and hide the time configuration dialog box, select Do not show time config and import all data. Step 6 If you plan to set the system to delete statistic data automatically, select Delete statistic data automatically. Step 7 In the Delete all special items days ago field, enter the value that indicates the interval you plan to delete special items. Step 8 Set the system to enter the days to delete all common items once in the Delete all common item days ago field. Step 9 In the Delete CHR Records day(s) ago field, enter the value that indicates how many days you plan to delete CHR records. Step 10 If you plan to backup OMC configuration data, select Backup OMC As Plan. Step 11 If the Backup OMC As Plan is selected, you need to set the backup cycle and the begin time. Step 12 Click OK. ----End
You need to back up and delete the runtime file timely. You need to back up the log files under the Bin\Runtime directory. A large amount of log files occupies too much disk space and decrease system performance. For the data segmented by the Stattrans or dynamically segmented by the NAConvert, do not select Verify Statistic Data. Otherwise, the data cannot be imported.
Statically Importing Performance Data

To statically import the performance data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a BSC from the project view window shown in Figure 4-25. Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import Stat Data row. The Step 3 Click button is displayed. .
The Browse for Folder dialog box displayed. Step 4 Choose the path of BSC performance data from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and then click OK. Step 5 Right-click Import Stat Data task on the main view window. The Statistic Data Import menu item is added to the shortcut menu.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-25
Step 6 Choose Statistic Data Import from the shortcut menu. The Tasks Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-34. Figure 4-34 Tasks Information dialog box
Step 7 Select Import all statistic data. Step 8 Set the start date and end date in the Input Date field. Step 9 Set the start time and end time in the Input Time field.
4-26
Step 10 Click Check Task Time. The Check Task Time dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-35. Figure 4-35 Check Task Time dialog box
Step 11 All the tasks are selected by default. Choose the analysis task to be imported, and then click OK to return to the Tasks Information dialog box. Step 12 Click OK. After the performance data is successfully imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-36. Figure 4-36 Import success information
----End
Before you statically import the statistic traffic data, ensure that the configuration data of the current BSC is imported, and the path for the traffic statistic data in the statistic data directory is valid.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-27
4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data

To import performance data dynamically, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a created BSC from the main view window, as shown in Figure 4-37. Figure 4-37 Created BSC
Step 2 Choose the performance data file to be dynamically imported from the File Path in the main view window. For details, see section 4.3.1 "Importing BSC Configuration Data." Step 3 Right-click a task name in the main view window, and then choose Task Setting from the shortcut menu. The Import Task setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-38. Figure 4-38 Import Task setting dialog box
Step 4 Click Advance. The Import Task Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-39.
4-28
Figure 4-39 Import Task setting dialog box
Step 5 Select Execute As Plan, and the dynamically import setting is finished, as shown in Figure 4-40.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-29
Figure 4-40 dynamically import setting dialog box
The system imports data dynamically and the Transdata checks whether new performance data is uploaded in real time. If the new data is uploaded, import the data. When click the each BSC/PCU, the property Import Server IP displays the IP address of the database server imported. There are three states for each BSC/PCU of the Transdata, as follows:

Has not been set to import automatically state by any Transdata, the icon is Has been set to import automatically state by local computer, the icon is .
Has been set to import automatically state by the other one computer, the icon is
When the users want to modify the BSC/PCU state, the system display a dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-41
4-30
Figure 4-41 The parameters can not be modified
----End
Trigger Time in Execute As Plan refers to the interval during which the dynamical import is performed. You can choose Every 5 Minutes, Every 30 Minutes, Every 1 Hour, or Every 24 Hours. Enable Time refers to the first time to perform the task. If you log in to the Transdata again, the dynamic trigger time count from the Transdata program starting running time rather than Enable Time. Do not process refers to that you need not process the imported data, and Delete all data file import refers to that you can delete the imported data.
4.3.5 Deleting History Data

You can delete the expired data from the current NET to spare more space for the database. To delete the history data of the NET, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a NET node from the project view window, and then choose Del History Data from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-42.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-31
Figure 4-42 Shortcut menu
If no history data exists in the NET, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-43 Figure 4-43 Information dialog box
4-32

If history data exists in the NET, the History Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-44. Figure 4-44 History Data dialog box
Step 2 Specify the date range within which the data to be deleted, or select Delete all history data to delete all history data. Step 3 If you plan to compress the database, select Shrink Database. Step 4 If you plan to delete the common data, select Delete common data. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
4.4 Task Management

4.4.1 Initializing a Task
If you initialize a task, all the created and modified tasks are missing and the task is restored to the initial status. This task is performed only when a large amount of tasks are damaged or unavailable on a local network. To initialize a task, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a NET node in the project view window.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-33
A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Figure 4-45 Shortcut menu
Step 2 Choose Initial Task from the shortcut menu to initialize a task. A message is displayed, indicating the initialization of a task, as shown in Figure 4-46. Figure 4-46 Message displayed during task initialization
----End
4-34
4.4.2 Backing Up a Task

Backing up a task refers to backing up the information about new or modified tasks to \TASK\Backup\. After you modify a great number of tasks or perform important operations, Huawei recommends that the server administrator or the user backs up the task periodically. To back up a task, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a NET from the project view window. A shortcut menu displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose Backup Task from the shortcut menu to back up the task. A message is displayed, prompting you that backing up a task successfully, as shown in Figure 4-47. Figure 4-47 Message of task backup
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-35
The system saves only the information about the latest backup task. If you want to save the task backup information in different periods, you can manually copy the following BCP files to \TASK\Backup\.

CommItemDict.bcp CommStatTableDesc.bcp CommTableIdx.bcp Erl_b.bcp GRAPHDRAWITEMS.bcp PRESQL.bcp ITEDRAWITEMS.bcp TASKEXP.bcp TASKS.bcp
If you want to restore the task information, you can copy the nine files that you have saved to the directory \TASK\Backup\.
4.4.3 Restoring a Task

You can restore a task by using the relevant backup file. If you plan to restore the task, copy the nine backup files to the \TASK\Backup\ directory. To restore a task, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a NET from the project view window. A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose Resume Task from the shortcut menu to restore a task. A message is displayed, prompting you to restore the task. Figure 4-48 shows the displayed message. Figure 4-48 Message of task restore
----End
4-36
4.5 Drawing Out Data and Importing Data File

4.5.1 Drawing Out Data
The draw out data function exports files from the following tables:

Cell information table BSC information table Common statistic index of BSCs Common statistic index of CELLs
The draw out data can delete the history statistic data for keeping running the system high-powered. To draw out data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose KPI Backup Data from the shortcut menu, and then perform the draw out data, as shown in Figure 4-49. Figure 4-49 Draw out data
Step 3 Click Browse to choose the data file path. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-50.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-37
Figure 4-50 Browse for Folder dialog box
Step 4 Change the file name in the file name field. You can also use the default file name. Step 5 Set the date range for data drew out in Period of date. The default value is the time of database. Step 6 Set Other Option.

If the Delete data after draw out is selected, deleted data after draw out. If the Delete data after draw out is not selected, do not delete data after draw out.
Step 7 Click OK to perform the draw out data, as shown in Figure 4-51. Figure 4-51 The prompt of drawing out data successfully
----End
4-38
4.5.2 Importing Data File

When you need to analyze and forecast the network trend, you can import the key data to analyze. For example, you need to analyze the network trend of the latest three months, but you have only data of the latest one month. In this case, you can import other two months data to database, and then perform the analyzing. You can delete the history data after analyzing. To import data files, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose KPI Restore Data from the shortcut menu, and then perform the import the data file. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-52. Figure 4-52 Data import
Step 3 Choose the file need to be imported, and then click Open. The Restore time select dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-53.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-39
Figure 4-53 Restore time select
Step 4 Set the start time and end time for data. Step 5 Click OK, and then perform the importing the data file. The import successfully prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-54. Figure 4-54 The prompt of importing successfully
----End
4.6 LAN and Remote Network

4.6.1 Manually Exporting LAN Data
The LAN data export can be realized through the BCP tool provided by the Microsoft Transform the data needed import to related BCP files, and then integrates the LAN data to export module through the Transdata. To manually export LAN data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose Export Net Common Data from the shortcut menu. The Export Net Common Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-55.
4-40
Figure 4-55 Export Net Common Data
Step 3 Click Browse to choose the save path. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-56. Figure 4-56 Browse for Folder
Step 4 Choose the data type, the default value is choose Both.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-41
The data types are as follows:

Only config data Only performance data Both
Step 5 Set the begin date and end date in Export Date. Step 6 Click OK, and then perform the LAN data export manually. The export successfully prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-57. Figure 4-57 The prompt of exporting successfully
----End
4.6.2 Automatically Exporting LAN Data

To export the LAN data automatically, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45.. Step 2 Choose Data Export Setting from the shortcut menu to perform the LAN data export manually.
4-42
The Data Export Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-58. Figure 4-58 Setting the auto export data
Step 3 Click Browse to choose the save path. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-56. Step 4 Choose the export way. There are two export ways:

Run on point: Export the data which is the whole days before the pointed time, beginning at the time set by Net Data Export Begin Date field. The interval is 24 hours. Run per cycle: Since the time from the set time, there is N+1+the time interval set, set the beginning time in Net Data Export Begin Date field, the interval is N hours, the system begin to export the data.
Step 5 Select whether to delete network data. Step 6 Set the beginning time of exporting in the Net Data Export Begin Date field. Step 7 Click OK, and then perform the LAN data auto export. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-43
4.6.3 Manually Importing LAN Data

Once the provincial network database receives the compressed BPC files on LAN through FTP uploaded, decompresses the files, and then parses the files which LAN exported to database by BCP. To manually importing LAN data, performs the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose Import Net Common Data from the shortcut menu, to perform the LAN data imported manually. The Import Net Common Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-59. Figure 4-59 Import Net Common Data
Step 3 Click Browse. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-60.
4-44
Figure 4-60 Open Data
If you perform the import task for the first time, the configuration information in database is null, so you need to import the configuration information at first, then import statistic data, otherwise import procedure fail. Importing configuration data for the first time, it creates a net element table mapped. Step 4 Click OK. ----End
4.6.4 Automatically Importing LAN Data

To automatically import LAN data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-45. Step 2 Choose Data Import Setting from the shortcut menu. The Data Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-61.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-45
Figure 4-61 Data Import Setting
Step 3 Click Browse to choose the net data path, the Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-62. Figure 4-62 Browse for Folder
Step 4 Set the auto import way. There are two ways as following:

Periodically: the system detects one time per period, if data existed in the specified directory, perform the import operation Auto Synchronous: waiting the inform of windows file changed, once the specified directory file changed, windows informs the application program (performs the file change information register firstly), and then trigger the import procedure
4-46
Step 5 Click OK in the Import Net Data Setting dialog box. ----End
4.7 Transdata Maintainability Operation

4.7.1 Importing Data Warning Monitor
The warning monitor function is to track and record exceptions of importing data automatically, during the Transdata running. To set the warning monitor, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Tool> Warning Query. The Exception Watch dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-63. Figure 4-63 Exception Watch
Step 2 Specify the query type from the Select Type drop-down list. There are CHR Data, OMC Data and Stat Data, the default selection is CHR Data. Step 3 Select the NET name from the Select NET drop-down list. Step 4 Set the start date and end date of warning. Step 5 Set the save days in the Data Hold Day drop-down list. Step 6 Click Query to perform the warning query. Step 7 Click Save as Excel to save the result queried to excel.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-47
----End
4.7.2 Log
The log records help to locate the problems. To set the log, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Tools>LogSetting. The Log Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-64. Figure 4-64 Log Setting
Step 2 Click
to set file path.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-65.
4-48
Figure 4-65 Browse for Folder
Step 3 Select the period of log file generating from File Generate interval drop-down list. You can choose 1 hour, 3 hour, 6 hours, or 1 day. Step 4 Choose the save days of log file from the File hold day drop-down list to delete the recorded log before N days.
Current log file displays the current log located path. The default path of log file is the subdirectory of installation directory, and the name of subdirectory is Log.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
4-49
5 Common Operations
5
About This Chapter
Section 5.1 Project Management 5.2 Data Management
Common Operations
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes The management of projects, including the creation of a project, starting of a project, modification of a project, deletion of a project, and switch of a project. The management of data, including the configuration parameter import, management of project parameter, management of performance data, and parameter check. The management of user access rights and user log. How to manage NEs, including the creation, edition, movement, and deletion of a site. How to import or operate a map and how to manage a map or map layers. The common settings. How to process analysis results.
5.3 User Management 5.4 Managing NEs 5.5 Managing Map 5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions 5.7 Processing the Analysis Result
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-1
5 Common Operations
5.1 Project Management

5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management
The Nastar GSM client organizes and manages data through a project. The project defines the available operations and operable data, and saves the operation results. The common operations are as follows:
A project has two connection modes, namely, online mode and local mode. The Nastar GSM provides different functions for different connection modes. For details, see section 1.1.5 "Stand-Alone Mode." A project defines the overall configurations, which include the connection mode, server address, local network analysis, start time, end time, and busy time for traffic statistic analysis. The project also comprises the project information and configuration used to support network optimization analysis. A project saves the network analysis results. Each time you open the project, you can continue the network optimization analysis based on the previous network optimization analysis.
The SQL Server stores the information about one or multiple local networks, such as traffic statistic data and configuration data. The online mode project analyzes the associated local network and a local network on the server and contains several projects. The projects are independent from each other. The client program provides the project management function, such as creating, configuring, and deleting a project.
5-2
5 Common Operations
5.1.2 Creating a Project

To create a project, perform the following steps: Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client. The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1 Login dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-3
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Click Setting. The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2. Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog box
The Project list area in the left pane lists all the current available projects. The right panel shows the configuration of the selected project. You can modify the configuration. Step 3 Click Add. The New Project dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 New Project dialog box
5-4
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Enter a name for the new project, and then click OK. The new project is displayed in the Project list area, as shown in Figure 5-4. Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog box
Step 5 Set the configuration in the right pane.

Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list. Select the server settings. Select a map file.
You can select Online from the Mode drop-down list and select the data server to analyze traffic statistics. The import of a map file is optional. To import a map file, click to select the map file.
5.1.3 Opening a Project

If engineers need to analyze the performance data, ensure that the performance data is available.
Opening a Project for the First Time

To open a new project, perform the following steps: Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-5
5 Common Operations
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5. Figure 5-5 Login dialog box
Step 2 Select a project from the Project name drop-down list. Step 3 Type the user name and password in the User and Password fields.
If you select Remember Password, you need not type the user name and password next time.
Step 4 Click OK. The project is opened and the relevant information is displayed on the main program screen. ----End
The default path of each project on the local host is Nastar folder path\project\project name. You can copy a local project to the corresponding path, for example, Nastar folder path\project\project name on another host with the Nastar GSM client.
Switching to Another Project

To switch to another project, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Open Project. The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
5-6
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-6 shows the Project menu. Figure 5-6 Project menu
Step 2 Select another project from the Project Name drop-down list. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
5.1.4 Modifying and Deleting a Project

Modifying a Project
To modify a project, perform the following steps: Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client. The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5. Step 2 Click Setting The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4. Step 3 Select a project in Project list. The right pane shows the configurations of the selected project.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-7
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Set the configuration in the right pane of the new project.
Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list. If you select Online Mode, you need to set the server name, the database name, the login user name, and other configuration.
Set the server settings. You can type the database name directly, or click to select the database.
Select a map file. Importing a map file is optional. To import a map file, click to select the map file.
Step 5 Click OK. You can save the configuration. ----End
Deleting a Project
To delete a project, perform the following steps: Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client. The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5. Step 2 Click Setting The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4. Step 3 Select a project in Project list. Step 4 Click Delete. The project is removed from Project list. ----End
5.2 Data Management

5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management
The Nastar GSM supports the network optimization data, Huawei BSC optimization data, and Huawei PCU optimization data. The GENEX GSM Transdata supports the task management of data. For example, the GENEX GSM Transdata allows you to import data, export data, and delete data. You can also set the task performance time, data path, and data process method. The GENEX Nastar performs automatic data management. The following sections describe the data type, data source, general operations, and operation location in the Nastar GSM.
5-8
5 Common Operations
Data Type
The Nastar GSM supports engineering data, configuration data, and performance data. The supported data is as follows:

Engineering data BSC32

Configuration data Performance data Configuration data Performance data CHR data Uplink frequency point scan log Configuration data Performance data
BSC6000

PCU

Data Sources
When importing data, you need to choose proper data sources. Table 5-1 lists data sources. Table 5-1 Data sources Data Type Engineering data Configuration data BSC32 BSC6000 PCU Performance data BSC32 BSC6000 PCU CHR data Uplink frequency point scan data BSC6000 BSC6000 Data Source .xls file .dbf file .dat file Config.ini file .RES file MRF file Key performance index (KPI) file .GZIP file .FRQLOG file
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-9
5 Common Operations
Common Operations
The common operations include data import and data export. Table 5-2 describes the import data supported by the Nastar GSM. Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM Data Project parameter Data Description The project parameters supports the details about the BTS, whose key information is as follows:

BTS name BTS longitude BTS latitude Cell name Location area code (LAC) Cell identity (CI) Antenna azimuth Antenna declination angle Supporting the horizontal and vertical import of neighbor relations Supporting the neighboring files of a third vendor
Neighbor information
The neighbor information is as follows:

Configuration data
The configuration data includes the configuration parameter for cell and neighbor relations. You can import BTS configuration parameters of more than one vendor, which is as follows:

Huawei G3BSC32.20100.06.1120A, BSC6000, PCU, and later versions. Alcatel BSC72 version Siemens BSS BR60 Ericsson BSS R10 Motorola BSS R6, BSS R7
Digital map Performance data
Supporting the import of the digital map in Mapinfo format The data is in .tab or .gst format. Supporting the import of the performance data of the following released versions:

Huawei BSC32 Huawei BSC6000 PCU
The Nastar GSM can export the following types of data:

Project parameter Configuration parameter Neighboring cells in horizontal and vertical format
5-10

5 Common Operations
Huawei project parameters The parameters are exported in .xls format.
The Nastar GSM can export the following optimization reports:

Daily report Weekly report Monthly report Network monitoring report Configuration check reports Measurement report Comprehensive analysis report The query result is exported in .xls format.
The results that are displayed in chart are stored in the following formats:

TeeChart Pro files: .tee Enhanced Metafiles: .emf Metafiles: .wmf BMP JPG GIF PCX PDF PostScript
The Nastar GSM supports the export of the local maintenance terminal (LMT) support script of the BSC32 or BSC6000. The script is in .txt format.
Operation Location
Different data is configured by different programs.

The operation of engineering data, neighbor cell information, and data map performed in the GENEX Nastar GSM The operation of configuration data, performance data, CHR data and uplink frequency data performed in the GENEX Nastar Transdata
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-11
5 Common Operations
5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data

According to the different models of NEs, the import mode of configuration parameter is different. Table 5-3 describes the import mode of configuration parameters of each NE. Table 5-3 Importing configuration parameter mode NEs Model

Importing Configuration Parameter Mode Imports the configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM directly.
HUAWEI BSC32 Alcatel Siemens Ericsson Motorola HUAWEI PCU HUAWEI BSC6000
After the data is imported in the Transdata, the configuration parameters are imported through the function of download configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM.
On a local PC, you can directly import the configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM. Table 5-4 describes the following requirements:

Requirement of configuration parameter data Requirement of configuration parameter version Requirement files for configuration parameters Import procedure
Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement Configuration Parameter Requirement of configuration parameter data Description
Before importing configuration parameter, ensure that the project parameter is imported. The configuration parameters can be imported provided that the cell information of the project exists. Otherwise, all the configuration parameters fail to be imported. The LAC and CI of a cell in the configuration parameters must be the same as those imported in the project parameters. Only when the cells in the configuration data match those in the opened project, the cell configuration data can be imported successfully.
5-12
5 Common Operations
Configuration Parameter Requirement of configuration parameter version Huawei configuration data
Description

G3BSC32V300R002C10 G3BSC32V300R002C11 G3BSC32V300R002C12 G3BSC32V300R002C13 G3BSC32V300R006C01 G3BSC32V300R006C02 G3BSC32V300R007C01 G3BSC32V300R007C02 BSC72 BR6.0 Celldesc.dbf Symgdatl.dbf Rccfg.dbf Cellattr.dbf Bsccell.dbf Callctrl.dbf Cellcfg.dbf Swctrl.dbf Nebcell.dbf Nordata.dbf Clsdata.dbf Urgedat.dbf Pwrctls.dbf Freechpr.dbf Btspwrc.dbf Mspwrc.dbf Hw2pwrct.dbf Celcalmp.dbf
The configuration parameters can also be imported if one of the previous files does not exist, but you cannot guarantee the integrality of the Huawei configuration data.
Alcatel configuration data Siemens configuration data Requirement files for configuration parameters Huawei configuration data

Alcatel configuration data

Cell.csv rnlPowerControl.csv HoControl.csv
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-13
5 Common Operations
Configuration Parameter Siemens configuration data
Description .asv file
Importing Huawei Configuration Parameters

To import Huawei configuration parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Huawei.
5-14
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Select the directory of Huawei configuration parameters (.dbf), and then click OK to start the import. The information dialog box is displayed, as shown Figure 5-8. Figure 5-8 Information dialog box
You can choose whether to export the Huawei configuration data initial table.

Click Yes to generate a report. Click No not to generate a report.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-15
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Yes to save Huawei configuration data. The progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-9. Figure 5-9 Progress bar
The system automatically saves Huawei configuration parameters and displays the number of all imported records and the number of updated records. The total records information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-10. Figure 5-10 Total Records information dialog box
Step 4 Click OK. The reloading cell information is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11. Figure 5-11 Reloading cell information and Huawei neighbor relations wait progress bar
The Neb Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-12.
5-16
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog box
----End
Importing Alcatel Configuration Parameters

To import Alcatel configuration parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Alcatel.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-17
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Select the folder of Alcatel configuration parameters (.csv), and then click OK to start the import. The information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-14. Figure 5-14 Information dialog box

Click Yes to generate the report. Click No not to generate the report.
----End
5-18
5 Common Operations
Importing Siemens Configuration Parameters

To import Siemens configuration parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Siemens. The Choose Siemens configuration file dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-15. Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box
Step 2 Select the directory for Siemens configuration parameters (.ASC), and then click Open to start the import. An information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-16. Figure 5-16 Information dialog box

Click Yes to generate the report. Click No not to generate the report.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-19
5 Common Operations
----End
Downloading Configuration Data

The function of downloading configuration data is applied in online mode. When the configuration parameters are downloaded from the server, the vendor parameters in cell property are updated and some project parameters are updated. To download configuration data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Import the configuration parameter data in Transdata. Step 2 Download the configuration parameter data in the Nastar GSM to import configuration parameters. ----End The configuration data consists of the following project parameters:

BSC Name BISC Traffic channel (TCH) FH Mode HSN MA Equ Type Vendor TRXs
To download the configuration parameters and update the project parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Download Config Parameters. Step 2 Download the configuration parameters from the server. The Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-17. Figure 5-17 Synchronization Report dialog box
5-20
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click OK. Step 4 Close the Synchronization Report dialog box. You can also click Output to export the match result in an .xls file. The output result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-18. Figure 5-18 Output result window
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-21
5 Common Operations
Displaying Configuration Parameters

After the configuration parameters are downloaded successfully, they are displayed on the Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab page in the Property pane. Figure 5-19 shows the Huawei GRPS cell parameter pane. Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane
5-22
5 Common Operations
Exporting the Configuration Parameters of Huawei (Alcatel, Siemens)

To export the configuration parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters. Step 2 Choose a submenu of Export Config Parameters (Huawei, Alcatel, Siemens or Motorola). The Export Configuration Parameters submenu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-20. Figure 5-20 Submenu of exporting configuration parameters
Figure 5-21 shows the configuration parameter table. Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter table exported in an .xls file
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-23
5 Common Operations
Exporting Huawei PCU Configuration Parameters

To export Huawei PCU configuration parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters > Huawei (PCU). The Output PCU Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-22. Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog box
Step 2 Select the configuration parameters of the PCU.
5-24
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click OK. The configuration parameters exported in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-23. Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file
----End
5.2.3 Managing Project Parameters

This section describes how to manage project parameters in the Nastar GSM.
Importing Project Parameters

To import project parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Import Project Parameters.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-25
5 Common Operations
The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-24. Figure 5-24 Open dialog box
Step 2 Select the .xls file that contains project parameters, and then click Open. The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-25. Figure 5-25 Select Table dialog box
5-26
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Select the project parameter table to be imported, and then click OK. The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-26. Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog box
Step 4 Set the imported data. The system automatically identifies and matches some fields based on the project parameter table. For the unmatched or wrongly matched items, click the first column in the dialog box, and select the associated field from the shortcut menu. Click OK.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-27
5 Common Operations
The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-27. Figure 5-27 Confirming information dialog box
Step 5 If the confirm information dialog box lists some unmatched fields, click OK to proceed with the task. Otherwise, click Cancel to rematch the fields. Step 6 Click OK. The project parameters are successfully imported, as shown in Figure 5-28. Figure 5-28 Successfully importing the project parameter
The previous dialog box displays the number of imported and non-imported records. Click OK. The .xls file to show the non-imported records and show the wrongly imported field in red is displayed.
If you want to replace the configuration database in the previous site with the project parameter table to be imported, ensure that you have selected Clear Database in the dialog box. When the data setting is imported, the units of longitude and latitude are degree, minute, second, or decimalization based on the data type of the project parameters.
5-28
5 Common Operations
The description of latitude and longitude is as follows: Latitude: 0 to 90 degree refers to the northern hemisphere and 90 to 0 degree refers to the southern hemisphere. Longitude: 0 to 180 degree refers to the eastern hemisphere and 180 to 0 degree refers to the western hemisphere. ----End
Exporting Project Parameters

To export the project parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-29
5 Common Operations
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-29. Figure 5-29 Output dialog box
Step 2 In the Output dialog box, select the project parameters to be exported. Step 3 Click OK to export the project parameters of the current project. ----End
5-30
5 Common Operations
Comparing Project Parameters

To compare the project parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Compare Project Parameters. The menu of Compare Project Parameters is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-30. Figure 5-30 Compare project parameters menu
Step 2 Select a submenu of Compare Project Parameters from the shortcut displayed.

Select Last Closed from the shortcut displayed, which proceeds to compare the project parameters with the last closed project parameters. Select Last Imported from the shortcut displayed, which proceeds to compare the project parameter with the last imported project parameters.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-31
5 Common Operations
The result of comparing project parameters in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-31. Figure 5-31 Result of comparing project parameters
Table 5-5 describes the result of comparing project parameters Table 5-5 Description of the result of comparing project parameters Sheet Project Parameters Description The system compares the current project parameters with the last closed or last imported parameters Figure 5-32 shows the Project Parameters sheet, consists of the record of adding, deleting, and modifying the project parameters. Neighbor Record The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell relation with the last closed or the last imported one. Figure 5-3 shows the Neighbor Record sheet, consists of the records of adding, deleting, and modifying the configuration neighboring cell relation. Autoplan Neighbor Record The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell relation with the last generated planned neighboring cell relation. Figure 5-34 shows the Autoplan Neighbor sheet, consists of the records of adding, deleting, and modifying the configuration neighboring cell relation.
5-32
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet
Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-33
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet
----End
Backing Up Project Parameters

After the latest project parameters are imported, the system backs up the project parameter table automatically, and backs up the project parameters in the database.
Backing Up Project Parameters-Uploading the Project Parameters

To upload the project parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Project Parameters.
5-34
5 Common Operations
The Backup Project Parameter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35 and Figure 5-36. Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-35
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter dialog box
Step 2 Select Upload, and select an item to back up.

If Upload and to Last Item are selected, the existing backup item is selected automatically. Select Upload, and clear to Last Item, and select a backup item. The backup item named unused refers to the backup that is unused. When you upload the used backup, the used backup is automatically replaced with the previous backup.
Step 3 Enter a backup name in the Name field and the description for the backup in the Description field. The Name field is required and the Description field is optional.
5-36
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Click OK. An information box telling you that the uploading the project parameters successfully is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-37. Figure 5-37 Information box after you upload the project parameters
When other users upload or download the project parameters, you are not allowed to continue this operation, and then the system gives a prompt, which indicates that other users have locked the database. Wait a moment and try again. You can backup 100 different project parameters by server. The progress is the same as the synchronization of engineering data.
----End
Backing Up Project Parameters-Downloading the Project Parameters

To download the project parameters, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Project Parameters. The Backup Project Parameter dialog box displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35. Step 2 Select Download and a used backup item. Step 3 Click OK. After you succeed in downloading the project parameters, an information box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-38. Figure 5-38 Information box after you download the project parameters
Step 4 Click OK. The site map is updated.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-37
5 Common Operations
When other users download the project parameters, you cannot continue this operation. The system prompts that the database has been locked by other user. Wait a moment and try again.
----End
Restoring Project Parameters

You can cancel all changes in the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and planned neighboring cell relation to resume the parameters to the status of last imported.
Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Closed to restore all of the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and plan neighboring cell relation to the status of last closed. Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Imported to restore all of the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and plan neighboring cell relation to the status of last imported.
You should use the function of Undo Project Parameter Modification with care. If you use this function, all the added, deleted, and modified records imported the last time are missing. Huawei recommends that you export and back up the latest engineering parameters and neighboring relation.
5.2.4 Management of Performance Data

Importing the Performance Data
You can import the network performance data through the Transdata. The import mode consists of static import and dynamical import.

The static import is also termed as manual import. You can import data based on the files you choose. You can dynamically import the data by triggering time point. This mode is applied on site.
Backing Up the Data

To back up data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose System > Data Backup.
5-38
5 Common Operations
The Data Backup menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-39. Figure 5-39 Data Backup command
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-39
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Set a path for saving the file, and then click OK. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-40. Figure 5-40 Browse for Folder dialog box
Step 3 Specify a path for storing the backup data, and then click OK. The progress bar of data backup is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-41. Figure 5-41 Progress bar
Step 4 After the backup, the following message dialog box is displayed, indicating that the data backup is complete.
5-40
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-42 shows the message dialog box. Figure 5-42 Data backup complete dialog box
Restoring the Data

To restore the data, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > Data Restore. The data restore menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-43.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-41
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu
5-42
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Specify a path for saving files, and then click OK. The browse for folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-44. Figure 5-44 Browse for Folder dialog box
The progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-45. Figure 5-45 Progress bar
The data restore complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46. Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-43
5 Common Operations
----End
5.2.5 Checking Parameters

Checking the BSC Parameters
The parameter check is detailed as follows:

Check whether the network parameters consist with the recommended configurations Check uni-directional neighbor Check co-BCCH and co-BSIC cells Check co-frequency neighbors in the site Check the health status of the network planning data. Import .dbf files to perform the parameter check.
To check parameters rationality for the BSC, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check. The Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-47. Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box
5-44
5 Common Operations
Table 5-6 describes the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box. Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box Item Path BSC Description to select a path for saving the radio network Click planning (RNP) report, or use the default directory. Select or clear the BSC in BSC. Clearing all selected PCUs is recommended. In this way, only the BSC check report is generated.
Step 2 Click
to choose a path for saving the RNP check report.
Step 3 Specify a path, and then click OK. Step 4 Select one or more BSCs to be checked. Step 5 Click the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-45
5 Common Operations
The BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-49. Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page
Table 5-7 describes the elements on the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page. Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page Element Sheet setting ARFCN utilization check Co-BCCH Co-BSIC (neighbors) Single neighbors (network) Channel check Description For details, see section 11.5.5 "Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate" For details, see section.11.5.3 "Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC" Check all the unidirectional neighboring cells based on the neighboring relation Check whether the co-frequency exists in the neighboring cells frequency, based on the neighboring relation Check the cells with neighbors less than the number set in the Neighbor number field Check the cells of which the distance between the neighboring cells are longer than the number set in the Neighbor distance field
Cells with fewer neighbor check Far neighbor check
5-46
5 Common Operations
Element NebCell count setting Neighbor distance setting Neighbor number Neighbor distance
Description Enter the number of neighbors for check Enter the distance between the neighbors for check
Step 6 Set the parameters on the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page. Step 7 Click OK. The parameter rationality check report of the BSC is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-50.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-47
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file
----End
5-48
5 Common Operations
Huawei Configuration Parameter Check

The check report on Huawei configuration parameters is generated in the .xls. To generate a report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Huawei Configuration Parameter Check. The Huawei Configuration Parameter Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-51. Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting
Step 2 Specify a path, and select one or more Objects to be checked in the Huawei Configuration Parameter Check dialog box.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-49
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click OK. The report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters is created, as shown in Figure 5-52. Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file
5-50
5 Common Operations
Table 5-8 describes the four sheets of the configuration parameter check report. Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report Sheet Cover Problem-Cell list Configuration data check Description Displays the name of the network and the table heading of the reports Displays the problem of BSC configuration parameters Performs the following functions:
Checking and testing the configuration parameters based on recommended values Providing feasible suggestions Highlighting the values that are within or exceed the recommended values in different colors

PCU parameters check
Displays the results of PCU configuration parameters check
----End
The check of Huawei configuration parameters is based on the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800 Network Planning Data Configuration Regulations. The recommended value and ranges are set in common conditions. Owing to the actual condition of the DBF data of a cell, unhealthy conditions occur despite the recommended value. Network optimization engineers should check the value based on the checklist listed in the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800 Network Planning Data Configuration Regulations.
5.3 User Management

This section consists of the following two parts:

Management of User Access Rights Management of User Log
The management of user access rights refers to setting the rights for users for the Nastar and the Transdata, while the user log management refers to users' operation on Nastar log files.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-51
5 Common Operations
5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights

To set the user access rights, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > User Management. The User Management dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-53. Figure 5-53 User Management dialog box
5-52
5 Common Operations
Step 2 In User List, right-click a user and choose Set User Access Rights from the shortcut menu. The Set User Access Rights dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-54. Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box
Step 3 Set the rights for users, and then click OK. ----End
5.3.2 Management of User Log

To manage user logs, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > User Log.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-53
5 Common Operations
The User Log dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-55. Figure 5-55 User Log dialog box
Step 2 In the Log Information area, right-click a log file. Three options are available on the shortcut menu. Table 5-9 lists the functions of these options. Table 5-9 Options on the shortcut menu Option Update Export log files Clear all log files Used to Obtain the latest operation records of all login users. Save all the log information about the files. Clear the current log information.
5-54
5 Common Operations
----End
5.4 Managing NEs

This function manages the geographic location of the site station, information about a cell, and a BTS in a project.
5.4.1 Creating a Site

To create a site, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > New Site. The pointer turns into a cross. Step 2 Place the pointer on the BTS to be added in the Site View window. Click the BTS.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-55
5 Common Operations
The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-56. Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box
Step 3 Enter a site name for the BTS and other BTS information on the Site Information tab page.
5-56
5 Common Operations
Step 4 Click the Cell Information tab. The Cell Information tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-57. Figure 5-57 Cell Information tab page
The Cells text box displays all cells of the current BS. For a new BS, the Cells list of a new BS is initialized to be null. Step 5 Click Add to add a new cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell. Ensure that the TCH values are separated by commas. Step 6 Click OK. The BTS and its cells are created in the corresponding place of the site view window based on the latitude and longitude.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-57
5 Common Operations
----End
5.4.2 Editing a Site

To edit a site, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Edit Site. Step 2 Place the pointer on the BTS to be edited in the Site View window. Click the BTS. The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-58. Figure 5-58 Site Edit dialog box
Step 3 Edit the site and cell information. You can change the attribute of the site and cell.
5-58
5 Common Operations
You can also click Add to add a new cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell. Step 4 Click OK to save the changes of the site and close the Site Edit dialog box, or click Apply to save the changes. Do not close the Site Edit dialog box. ----End
If you delete all the cells in a site, the site is deleted.
5.4.3 Moving a Site

To move a site, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click on the toolbar and the mouse pointer becomes a hollow arrowhead.
Step 2 Drag the BTS to a desired new place. The confirmation of drag BTS operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-59. Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation
Step 3 Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation. ----End
5.4.4 Deleting a Site

To delete a site, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click on the toolbar and the mouse pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.
Step 2 Select a site, or press Ctrl key to select multiple sites. The selected sites displayed as red oblique grid. Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Site.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-59
5 Common Operations
The confirmation of deletion operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-60. Figure 5-60 Confirmation dialog box
Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected sites, or click No to cancel the operation. After the site is deleted, the neighbors are recalculated. ----End
5.4.5 Deleting a Cell

The procedure for deleting a cell is similar to that for deleting a site. To delete a cell, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click on the toolbar, the pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.
Step 2 Select a cell, or press the Ctrl key to select multiple cells. The selected cells perform in red oblique grid. Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Cell. The confirmation of the deletion operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-61 shows t. Figure 5-61 Confirmation dialog box
Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected cells. Or click No to cancel the operation. ----End
The BTSs and cells in this manual indicate only the operation process for the Nastar GSM. They do not represent the actual situation in the current network.
5-60
5 Common Operations
5.4.6 Querying NE Property

Choose the NE from the net element list in the workspace. The property of chosen NE in the right pane in the Property window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-62. Figure 5-62 Property window
Querying NE property function comprises the following:

Query cell information Query BTS information Query Huawei configuration parameter setting Query Huawei GPRS cell parameter
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-61
5 Common Operations
5.5 Managing Map

5.5.1 Overview
GENEX Nastar GSM comprises the following maps:

Digital map Reference grid map Scan map
Map management works on different maps.
5.5.2 Importing a Map

A map can be imported in the following two formats:

For details about how to import a .gst map, see 5.1.2 "Creating a Project". To import a .dat map, perform the following steps:
5-62
5 Common Operations
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Import Image Layer. The Open Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-63. Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-63
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Select an image, and then click Open. The Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-64. Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box
5-64
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click the map browser area to select the coordination location (longitude and latitude). The Click Image to add a point dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-65. Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog box
Step 4 Type a label name in Label, and type longitude and latitude values in the Longitude and Latitude fields. The Pixel X and Pixel Y are calculated by the system based on the map location. You need not type the values manually. Step 5 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to edit at least three points that are not located in a line. If you edit more points, the precision is much higher. Step 6 Click OK to close the Raster Image dialog box. The raster image layer is displayed on the map window. ----End
5.5.3 General Operation of a Map

The map is displayed in the site view window. You can use the toolbar button or right-click menu to perform with map. Figure 5-66 shows the site view toolbar. Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-65
5 Common Operations
Table 5-10 describes each item on the site view toolbar. Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar Item Description Click the button, and the pointer changes to icon shape. Click the view and you can move the map by moving the mouse. Click the button, and the mouse cursor change its shape to Click the view and place the selected map in the middle. Click the button, and the pointer becomes a common cursor. When you choose an NE, there is a color indicated in the map and related information displayed in the property window. Click the button to select a range in rectangle from the map. Click the button to select a range in circle from the map. Click the button and the mouse cursor changes to an icon shape. Click the view to zoom in the map. Click the button and the mouse cursor changes to an icon shape. Click the view to zoom out the map. Click the button and the map returns to the original state. Click the button, and then click the map. The distance between two points and the total distance will be counted automatically. Click the button, and then click the map. The angle will be measured automatically. Click the button and start the map layer control function. Click the button and start the import image layer function. .
5-66
5 Common Operations
5.5.4 Managing Map Layers

This function is performed to set layers. Click . The Layer Control dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-67. Figure 5-67 Layer Control dialog box
The map layer management includes the following operations:

Choose a map layer, for example, User Draw, and then use Up or Down to adjust the location. Use Add to add existing layers. Set Visible, Selectable, Automatic Labels, and Editable items for the chose layer. Set the Display and Labels.
5.5.5 Managing the Legend

Based on the information about the current map window and operation status, the Legend window displays relevant prompt messages. Choose View > Display Legend Window, or click Legend window. The Legend window shows different functions. on the toolbar to display or hide the
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-67
5 Common Operations
When a location area is displayed on the system for network optimization analysis, the Legend window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-68. Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis
The Legend window during adjacent channel checking is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-69. Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking
In most situations, choose View > Display Legend Window, or click on the toolbar to display or hide the Legend window. The content of the Legend window changes based on the operation status. You can also view or hide the reference grid, task window, navigator window, or cell content by choosing relevant menus or clicking relevant buttons on the toolbar.
5-68
5 Common Operations
5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions

5.6.1 Setting the Time Range
Before the generation of an analysis report, you need to set the time range. The setting of the time range is detailed as follows:
Set data range The data range usually comprises the Begin Time, End Time, and Statistic Cycle. The default value is the time of the current system. You can select the analysis time range.
Set busy time Busy time comprises All day, Busy time, and Other.

If you choose All day, the system exports an analysis report of the whole day. Choose the Busy time option, and the system exports an analysis report of the busy time. You can modify the time, and set three busy time intervals. Choose Other option, and the system exports analysis report of the other time. The other time can be set by the user.
5.6.2 Setting the Save Path

You should set the save path for the generation report function. To set the save path, perform the following steps:
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-69
5 Common Operations
Step 1 Click
in the prompt dialog box to choose the save path.
The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-70. Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder
Step 2 Select the save path in the dialog box. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups

The cell group setting helps you to query the data in a more convenient way. You can define a cell group by selecting a set of very important cells (VICs), or by selecting cells in an area as the statistic objects. You can select all of the cells or some of the cells to be queried, or select cells from different groups to be queried.
Creating a Cell Group

To create a cell group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group Setting. The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-71
5-70
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box
Step 2 Click New. The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-72.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-71
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog box
Step 3 Type a name in the Cell Group Name in the New Cell Group dialog box. Step 4 Select the cells from the Cell Group Name list. Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments. This step is optional. Step 6 Select the Save as area check box. By default, the checkbox is not selected. If you create an area, you need to assure that any one cell belongs to one area. Step 7 Click OK. ----End
You can perform fuzzy search to find the added cell by using key word.
5-72
5 Common Operations
Modifying a Cell Group

To modify a cell group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group Setting. The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-73. Figure 5-73 Cell Group dialog box
Step 2 Select a cell group from the Defined Cell Group list. Step 3 Click Modify. The Edit Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-74.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-73
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog box
Step 4 Select or clear the cells in the Cell Group Name list. Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments. Step 6 Select Save as area again. Step 7 Click OK. ----End
5-74
5 Common Operations
Deleting a Cell Group

To delete a cell group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group Setting. The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-75. Figure 5-75 Cell Group dialog box
Step 2 Select a cell group in the Defined Cell Group list. Step 3 Click Delete. The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation. Step 4 Click OK. The selected cell group is deleted from the Defined Cell Group list. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-75
5 Common Operations
Export a Cell Group

To export a cell group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group Setting. The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-76. Figure 5-76 Cell Group
Step 2 Select a cell group which need exported from the Defined Cell Group list. Step 3 Click Export, and then displayed the Save file dialog box. Step 4 Click Save to export cell group. ----End
5-76
5 Common Operations
Import a Cell Group

To import a cell group, perform the following steps: Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group Setting. The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-77. Figure 5-77 Cell group
Step 1 Click Import. The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-78.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-77
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-78 Open
Step 2 Choose cell group information, and then click Open. The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-79 Figure 5-79 Select table
Step 3 Choose a sheet, and then click OK. The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-80.
5-78
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-80 Import Setting
Step 4 Set the imported data. The system automatically identifies and matches some fields based on the table of cell group information. For the unmatched or wrongly matched items, click the first column in the dialog box, and select the associated field from the shortcut menu. The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-81.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-79
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-81 Import Setting
Step 5 Click OK. If there are cell group repeated, the prompt dialog is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-82. Figure 5-82 Cell group repeated
Step 6 Select the mode repeating cell group.

If Overlap the cell group is selected, the cell group in server is overlapped by the imported cell with the same name cell replace. If Ignore the cell group is selected, the cell group information does not import.
If you choose the default, the imported cell group selects the same mode.
5-80
5 Common Operations
Step 7 Click OK. The displayed informed dialog box, list the cell groups imported in file, cell groups imported successfully, incompletely and imported failure, as shown in Figure 5-83. Figure 5-83 Import information
Step 8 Click Yes, and then the Excel file opened, as shown in Figure 5-84. Figure 5-84 Importing cell group files
The description of Excel file displayed:

No color romance for information imported normally Romance with yellow for cell groups imported incompletely, and the red for the cell groups not imported Romance with red for the cell groups imported failure
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-81
5 Common Operations
5.6.4 Setting the Common Period

When you execute a performance measurement task and try to obtain the daily report, you do not need to set the query time that can be directly retrieved from the common period setting after the common period is set. Click Get from Database to retrieve the begin date and end date of all the performance statistics in the database. To set common period, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Common Period Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Common Period Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-85. Figure 5-85 Common Period Setting dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin date and End date. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronization Mode

If a project is in online mode, you can import data from local cells and create a mapping relationship between local cells and server cells. Creating a mapping relationship means mapping the cell data of a project to the cells on the server side. The server synchronization mode also creates a mapping between the engineering parameters imported into a project and the configuration data and performance data imported in the database. With the result of the traffic analysis shown on the map and engineering parameters, the result of the traffic analysis is displayed on the site view.
5-82
5 Common Operations
To create a mapping relationship between local cells and server cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Synch Mode Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Data Synchronization Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-86. Figure 5-86 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box
Step 2 Select a mapping criterion in the field of Mapping criteria. The mapping criteria is as follows:

Cell name LAC+CI
Step 3 Click OK. After the mapping, a Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-87. Figure 5-87 Synchronization Report dialog box
Step 4 Click Ok. The system prompts you to check the mapping result. Step 5 Click Output result to export the synchronization report in an .xls file. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-83
5 Common Operations
If the engineering parameters in a project are not changed, you only need to implement the synchronization once. If the engineering parameters are changed or re-imported, you need to synchronize server data.
Whether the engineering parameters are not imported and the synchronization is not implemented, does not affect the traffic result analysis.
5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups

The BSC group setting helps you to query the data in a more convenient way. You can define a BSC group by selecting a set of BSCs. You can select all of the BSCs or some of the BSCs to be queried, or select BSCs from different groups to be queried.
Creating a BSC Group

To create a BSC group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble Shooting pane. Figure 5-88 shows the BSC group dialog box. Figure 5-88 BSC Group dialog box
5-84
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Click New. Figure 5-89 shows the New BSC Group dialog box. Figure 5-89 New BSC Group dialog box
Step 3 Type a name in the BSC group name in the New BSC Group dialog box. Step 4 Select the BSCs from the BSC group name list. Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of BSC group Description. This step is optional. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-85
5 Common Operations
Modifying a BSC Group

To modify a BSC group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Figure 5-90 shows the BSC Group dialog box. Figure 5-90 BSC Group dialog box
Step 2 Select a BSC group from the Defined BSC Group list.
5-86
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Modify. Figure 5-91 shows the BSC Group Edit dialog box. Figure 5-91 BSC Group Edit dialog box
Step 4 Select or deselect the BSCs in the BSC group name list. Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of BSC Group Description. Step 6 Click OK. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-87
5 Common Operations
Deleting a BSC Group

To delete a BSC group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting page. Figure 5-92 shows the BSC Group dialog box. Figure 5-92 BSC Group dialog box
Step 2 Select a BSC group in the Defined BSC group list. Step 3 Click Delete. The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation, as shown in Figure 5-93. Figure 5-93 Delete BSC group
Step 4 Click OK. The selected BSC group is deleted from the Defined BSC Group list. ----End
5-88
5 Common Operations
5.7 Processing the Analysis Result

After the task is executed, you can query, collect, and calculate the statistics according to the indicators that are customized previously. The query result is displayed in the table window. Generally, the query result consists of the following parts:

The first part lists common information, such as time, BSC, regions, area attributes, and cell names. The second part lists key indicators, such as values of various indicators collected after the query, statistics, or computation. The last part lists the cell identity (ID). The cell ID is only an internal indicator for each cell in the system. That is, the cell ID is not important for users. The cell ID, however, plays an important role in the system. For example, the cell ID is required for functions, such as automatic related display of site views and quick query of performance data.
After traffic statistic query, the following operations are available:

Instant drawing Exporting the query result in an .xls file Quick query of traffic statistic Printing query result Controlling query result data (copy, paste and cut) Summing up the selected area Sorting result Filtering data
You should set the display control based on the result except exporting to an .xls file, hiding columns, and showing columns. The contents will be described in the following sections.
5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table

Quick Drawing
Besides defining the draw setting during the pre-setting of a task, you can also use the quick drawing function after the query of the result, and display the legend for the query result. To set the quick drawing, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select Quick Draw Setting from the shortcut menu. The Quick Draw Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-94.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-89
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-94 Quick Draw Setting dialog box
Step 2 Select X-axis, Y1 axis, and Y2 axis columns on the Quick Draw Setting dialog box.
5-90
5 Common Operations
Step 3 Click Draw to start the quick drawing. The quick drawing result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-95. Figure 5-95 Quick drawing
During the quick drawing, Huawei recommends that you select multiple indicators of a cell in a distributed period. This method is effective. If the Y-axis values of different indicators are of great discrepancy, Huawei recommends that you select both Y1 axis and Y2 axis.
----End
Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File

Click on the toolbar to export the query result in an .xls file.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-91
5 Common Operations
Printing the Query Results

If there is a printer available, you can print all of the query results. To print the query results, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click to export data to an .xls file.
Step 2 Open the .xls file to print the results. ----End
Controlling the Query Result Data

Controlling query result data involves the following operations:

Coping data Pasting data Cutting data
You can copy, paste, and cut data in the result sheet. These operations are similar to those in the Microsoft Windows.
Summing Up the Selected Area

We can sum up the result of a row or a column. Firstly, select an area to be summed up, and then click . The system automatically sums up values of the selected area. For example, the sum of the counter for TCH overflow (including switching) can be found in line 262, as shown in Figure 5-96.
5-92
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-96 Sum of a selected row
Sorting the Results

By default, the task query result is ranged by the column header of the common information. The common information includes the following fields:

Vendor BSC Regions Terrain attributes Cell names Time
To sort the query results, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select an area that requires the sum. Step 2 Click or to re-sort the query result.
Step 3 Click common information, for example, TCH Call Drop Rates. The query result is resorted by TCH Call Drop Rates, as shown in Figure 5-97.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-93
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-97 Result sorting
----End
Filtering the Query Results

You can filter the query results to display the data that you are concerned with. This function is helpful when there are huge amounts of query data. To filter the query results, perform the following steps: Step 1 Click .
The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-98.
5-94
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-98 Filtering query results
Step 2 Click the arrow of the drop-down list to select or deselect the items from the drop-down list. Step 3 Click again to exit the filter.
The system shows all of the data. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-95
5 Common Operations
Tiling the Window

You can tile the window in a horizontal style or in a vertical style to facilitate your viewing and comparison.

Select Tile Horizontal on the shortcut menu to tile the current window horizontally, as shown in Figure 5-99. Select Tile Vertical on the shortcut menu to tile the current window vertically.
Figure 5-99 Stretching window
Creating a Cell Group

To create a cell group, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a row or multiple rows in the table and right-click on the selected area.
5-96
5 Common Operations
Step 2 Choose New Cell Group from the shortcut menu of the selected rows, as shown in Figure 5-100. Figure 5-100 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu
A cell group is displayed. The selected rows are added to the new cell group. ----End
Setting the Geographical Display for Performance Data

This task is performed to set display intervals and related colors to be displayed on the map. For example, if the data is at an interval, the related cell on the map is colorized when this function is implemented. This template lists the specified indicators of a specified cell in a period in an ascending or descending order. This template facilitates your review of the TopN cells with a specified indicator.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-97
5 Common Operations
Take the cell KPI weekly trend task as an example. To set the geographical display for traffic statistic, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click Draw Selected Column on Map on a column heading in the result report, as shown in Figure 5-101. Figure 5-101 Draw Selected Column on Map option
The Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-102.
5-98
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-102 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box
Step 2 In the area of Color Setting, select Automatically or Manually.

If you select Automatically, set Start color and End color. If you select Manually, set color for each interval by double-clicking the color unit in the grid.
Step 3 Click Add or Delete to add or remove ranges in the Range setting list. Alternatively select a value in the Set range number to set the range number. You can give description of each range in the description area of the grid. If you leave it blank, the system automatically gives descriptions according to the value of each range. Step 4 In the Set Min and Max group, select the options according to your requirements.

If you select Manually, set minimum and maximum values for each grid. If you select Obtain automatically, the system gets the minimum and maximum values from the OWC report sheet. If you select customize, you need to enter only the minimum and maximum values.
Step 5 Select the range type in the area of Range type and select the sort type in the area of Sort type. Step 6 Click OK. The result on the map is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-103.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-99
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-103 Geographical display of performance data
----End
When executing this operation in the query result, you may find that the data of a cell is more than previous one. The Having same cell data row message box is also displayed.
5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart

Draw an analysis chart quickly. For details about the quick chart, see section 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table." The quick chart is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-104.
5-100
5 Common Operations
Figure 5-104 Quick drawing
You can process the chart with some basic or three-dimensional operation, through the toolbar or by right-clicking the chart.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-101
5 Common Operations
The toolbar can perform the rotate, move, zoom out, display the chart in-depth, display three-dimensional chart and so on, each function as shown in Table 5-11.
Figure 5-11 describes the items on the toolbar. Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar Icon Description Move the curve in the chart Rotate the chart Move the chart Zoom in or out the chart Display the chart in-depth Display three-dimensional (3D) chart Edit the chart Print the chart Copy the chart Save the chart
To zoom in or out the chart, first select , then move up the mouse to zoom out the chart or move down the mouse to zoom in the chart by pressing the mouse. The default format of saving a chart is to save the chart is TeeChart Pro files (.tee), you can save chart in multiple formats.
5-102

5 Common Operations
The shortcut menu can realize the function of printing, displaying, and background color setting. Right-click menu in the site view, the menu is shown in Figure 5-105.
Figure 5-105 Chart analysis menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
5-103
5 Common Operations
Table 5-12 describes the function of each item in the analysis chart. Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart Item Show index item Description Show all the query index items by default. The tick in front of the item means the curve is displayed, you can choose the curve list or not Undo zooming in or out Show preview Print the chart, the same as Display the dynamic chart The mark is not displayed by default. The tick in front of the item means the mark is displayed, you can choose the mark list or not Show the legend by default. The tick in front of the item means the legend is displayed Default showing the legend, you can choose the legend list or not Set the background color. Set the different background direction Legend position is on the bottom of the chart by default. You can set the legend position on the top, bottom, left or right of the chart. on the toolbar
Undo zoom Preview Print Active Display Show mark Show legend
Gradient color Gradient direction Legend position
Gradient direction comprises seven different gradient modes, click Gradient Direction, and it will show different gradient direction. The legend selects all the index items (user can define the index item) by default, as shown in Figure 5-106.You can select the legend by right-click menu or legend dialog box.
Figure 5-106 Legend
5-104
6 Optimizing the Network
6
About This Chapter
Section 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Geographic Display
Optimizing the Network
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes Introduction to network optimization Introduction to the various geographic display
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-1
6.1 Introduction
To enable you to perform further analysis on the current site view, the system provides the function of network optimization. Geographic display realizes the analysis and query for current network system.
6.2 Geographic Display

6.2.1 Background
The geographic display function of the Nastar GSM system facilitates further analysis and query to a great extent.

Search current cell through different methods. Display the related information of network. Modify the display setting.
6.2.2 Searching a Cell

You can search a cell through the following two methods:

searching a cell through the menu of the system searching a cell through NE list
Searching a Cell through the Menu of the System

To search a cell through the menu of the system, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Search Cells.
6-2
The Search Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog box
Step 2 Select the search mode.

Select Search by Name to search a cell with the keyword of the cell name. You need to type only a keyword of the cell name in Keyword to start fuzzy search. Select Search by CI to search the cell by cell identity. You need to type only the cell identity of the cell to start exact search.
Step 3 Enter the keyword of a cell or the cell identity in Keyword. The Search Result list shows the information of the search result, Cell name, CI, Site and Site Type. Step 4 Click an item in the Search Result list. The relevant cell is displayed in the center of the Site View window and all the properties of the cell are shown in the Property pane on the right side. The system supports real-time co-activated display of the cell lists, Site View window, and Property pane. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-3
Searching a Cell through NE List

Search a cell through the NE list, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the NE list window on the workspace, click .
The search a cell dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2. Figure 6-2 searching a cell
Step 2 Select the search mode, the default mode is By Cell Name, that is, to search a cell by key word. You can also search a cell by Cell CI. The Cell Identity (CI) is 16-bit cell identity.

Select By Cell Name, you need only to enter a key word of cell name, to perform fuzzy search. Select By Cell CI, you need to enter CI to perform precise search.
The search result displays all cells searched in NE list box. Step 3 Click an item from the NE list box. The related cell of the item displayed in the center of the map, and the property of the cell displayed in property window as well. The system supports linkage of the cell list, site view and the property page. ----End
6-4
6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area or a Site

Displaying a Location Area
This function is to display the location area division of the current network. For a network, dividing the location area incorrectly, for example, the boundary of the location area located in the place with many users, or the location area divided along heavy traffic road, may cause many problems. Such as signal traffic increasing, network resource over-occupied, frequent switch, and switchover failure. To display the location area, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display LAC. The Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3. Figure 6-3 Location area displaying setting dialog box
Step 2 Select Range Setting.

Select All Network Location Area to show all location areas. Select Specified Location Area to show a specified location area.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-5
Step 3 Click Color Setting. The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-4. Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog box
Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and then click OK.
6-6
Step 5 Click OK in the Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box. It is necessary to check and adjust the partition of the location area, especially view the partition situation of the current location area with the map information, as shown in Figure 6-5. Figure 6-5 LAC displayed on the map
In the Legend pane, different colors indicate different location areas. The value before the bracket is the LAC ID, and the value in the bracket is the number of cells in the LAC area. From the map, you can infer that three LAC areas of EASTWOOD are embedded in LAC 11012 area. The division is not proper as regarding the network optimization. The three LAC areas may cause the increase of signal traffic, over-frequent location altering, and handover problems. Therefore, modifying the location area property of EASTWOOD is a must. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-7
The edge of the location area is based on cell blocks. Therefore, the display of cell blocks is required in this operation. If this operation does not work, choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Setting and select Display cell blocks.
Displaying the GPRS Cells

This function is to view the distribution of the GPRS cells in service on the network. To display the GPRS cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display GPRS Cells. The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-6. Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box
Step 2 Select the color on the Color Setting dialog box.
6-8
Step 3 Click OK. The distribution of the GPRS cells in service on the current network is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-7. Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map
The GPRS cells are highlighted in the selected color to distinguish from the non-GPRS cells. ----End
Displaying the BSC Coverage

This function is to view the coverage of the BSC in the current network. This function provides references for locating the problems of network failure, and provides information for network optimization, such as solving the problem of handover.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-9
To display the BSC coverage, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display BSC Coverage. The BSC Display Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8. Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box
Step 2 Set Range Setting.

Select Whole network to show all the BSCs in the network. Select Specified BSC to show the selected BSC in BSC list. BSC list is available only when Specified BSC is selected.
Step 3 Click Color Setting. The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-9. Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog box
Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and then click OK.
6-10
Step 5 Click OK in the BSC Display Setting dialog box The coverage situation of the selected BSC is highlighted in the selected color, as shown in Figure 6-10. Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-11
Displaying All Sites

Choose Geographic Display > Display All Sites to display all sites of 900 MHz and 1800 MHz on the map. The sites of 900 MHz and 1800 MHz are displayed on the map in different colors and sizes, as shown in Figure 6-11. Figure 6-11 All sites displayed on the map
The function of cell block and the other functions based on the cell block are applied to a single layer. The cell blocks are displayed inaccurately when all sites are displayed.
6-12
6.2.4 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme

Customized indexes of the project parameters are defined by users with a value. All user-defined items of cells are classified and displayed in different colors in the site view. To display the network optimization theme, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Network Optimization Theme Setting, as shown in Figure 6-12. Figure 6-12 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-13
The Show Theme dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13. Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box
Table 6-1 describes the elements in the Show Theme dialog box. Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box Element Color Setting Start Color End Color Indicator Setting Indicator Description Range Setting Button Add Delete Description Select the start color. Select the end color. Select an indicator (USERDEF1USERDEF 10) to be colored. Enter the description of the indicator. Add legend description and set the lower limit and upper limit. Click the button to add a range. Click the button to delete the selected range.
Step 2 Edit the elements based on the description in Table 6-1.
6-14
Step 3 Click OK to highlight the map of the network optimization theme. The result of the highlighted theme is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme
The legend window displays the different ranges set by users. The first digit of the number in a bracket refers to the number of cells at the 900 MHz layer, and the last digit means the number of cells in the 1800 MHz layer. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-15
6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid

Displaying the reference grid helps to judge the distance between BTSs. The reference distance of the reference grid is 500 meters by default. Choose Geographic Display >Display Reference Grid, or click display or hide the reference grid. on the toolbar to
When the reference grid is displayed, the Site View window is shown in Figure 6-15. Figure 6-15 Reference grid
6-16
6.2.6 Switching 900/1800 Layer

For a dual-frequency network, generally, you need to switch 900/1800 MHz layer during network optimization analysis or traffic statistic analysis. The 900 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 900 MHz layer
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-17
The 1800 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17. Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer
Click the relevant cell to display the cell in the center of the map. If the cell does not exist in the current layer, the system program automatically switches to another level. You can also manually switch layers by choosing Geographic Display > Switch to layer 900/1800, or on the toolbar of the map. When the map window is selected, you can also press clicking Ctrl+W to switch between layers quickly.
In most cases, you can switch between layers of a dual band network by choosing Geographic Display > Switch to layer 900/1800, or clicking preceding operations. on the toolbar of the toolbar. Then you can perform the
6-18
6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching

The function of configuring the neighbors switching can perform the switching between configuration neighbors and plan neighbors.

Choose Geographic Display > Switch to Config. Neighbors to switch to configuration neighbors; Choose Geographic Display > Switch to Plan Neighbors to switch to simulated neighbors, that is, the automatic planned neighbors.
6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map

To render project parameters on the map, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Render Project's Parameters. The Project Parameter Select dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-18. Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog box
Step 2 Select a project parameter in Param List.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-19
Step 3 Click Next. The Color Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-19. Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box
Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to set the colors for the selected parameter. Step 5 Select Effect on antenna or Effect on section in Display Option. The Effect on section option is selected by default.
6-20
Step 6 Click OK to render the map. The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20. Figure 6-20 Display on the map
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-21
6.2.9 Modifying Display Setting

Setting Cell Display
To set the cell show setting, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Display Setting. The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-21. Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box
Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field.

Site Site Label Antenna Cell Label Sector
Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field. If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. If the zoom value exceeds the range, the BTS antenna is not displayed. You can set the range based on the antenna density on the map. Step 4 Set the showing color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
6-22
Setting Cell Label

To set a cell label, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Label Setting. The Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22. Figure 6-22 Option dialog box
Step 2 Set the cell label content in Cell Label. Step 3 Select Detail Label to display the detailed label. Step 4 Click Fonts to set the label in Label Option.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-23
Step 5 Click OK to display the cell label on the map. The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-23. Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label
----End
6-24
Setting Reference Grid

To set a reference grid, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Display Option > Reference Grid Setting. The Grid Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-24. Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box
Step 2 Enter the grid length and select the color. Step 3 Click OK. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-25
Setting Configuration Parameters Display

To set configuration parameters display, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Config Parameter Display Setting. The Config data show setting dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6-25. Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box
Step 2 Select Huawei in the Vendor area. Step 3 Choose a data type required in the Type drop-down list. Step 4 Add or remove the data items in the Selected Config Data list by using items in the All Config Data list.
6-26
Step 5 Click OK. The Huawei configuration parameters on the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab page of the Property window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-26. Figure 6-26 Property window
----End
When the selected cells use Huawei devices, the configuration parameters of the cells are Huawei configuration parameters. The Property window displays the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab. If the selected cell uses equipment of other vendors, the configuration parameters of the cell must be the configuration parameters of the corresponding manufacture. The Property window displays the corresponding tab. A cell can be configured with only one manufacturers configuration parameters.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-27
6.2.10 Map Legend

Add Legend
To add legend, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Map Legend > Add Legend. The pointer turns into a cross. Step 2 Place the pointer on the map and Click. The Add Map Mark dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-27. Figure 6-27 Add Map Mark
Step 3 Enter a Mark Name. Step 4 Click Add. The Mark is added in the corresponding place on the map. ----End
Select Legend
To select legend, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Map Legend > Select Legend. The Map Mark dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-28.
6-28
Figure 6-28 Map Mark
Step 2 Select a Mark in the Map Mark dialog box. The relevant mark is displayed in the center of the Map. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
6-29
7 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors
Automatic Optimization of Neighbors
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 7.1 Overview 7.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Neighbor Optimization 7.3 Procedures for Automatic Optimization of Neighbors Description The automatic optimization of neighbors. The import and analysis of measurement tasks.
The procedures for automatically optimizing neighboring cells.
7.1 Overview
Automatic optimization of neighbors helps to sort out the defined neighboring cells, undefined neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and missing neighboring cells of each serving cell from the M2000 measurement task files and the Nastar database. Automatic optimization of neighbors helps to analyze the reasons for redundant and missing neighboring cells and provides recommended operations. You can optimize a single cell or cells in batch mode. The application scenarios of automatic neighbor optimization are as follows:
Fine neighbor optimization Through fine optimization, you can optimize the neighboring cells of problematic cells and VIP cells professionally.
Bulk neighbor optimization Bulk neighbor optimization helps to solve most of the problems regarding a large number of neighboring cells.
Table 7-1 lists the information about the database versions of the BSC and Nastar that helps to implement automatic optimization of neighbors.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-1
Table 7-1 Information about the database versions of the BSC and Nastar Object BSC6000 BSC32 Database Requirement V9R8C01 or a later version G3BSC32V300R8C01 or a later version

SQL Server 2000 Standard or Enterprise Edition MS Access
7.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Neighbor Optimization

The automatic neighbor optimization function of Nastar GSM enables you to directly import measurement task for analysis. You can also manually set measurement tasks for analysis.
7.2.1 Importing a Measurement Task for Analysis

To import a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Neighbors. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-1.
7-2
Figure 7-1 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors dialog box
Step 2 Click on the toolbar. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 7-2, select a measurement task file, which is in .xls format.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-3
Figure 7-2 Selecting a measurement task file for automatic neighboring cell optimization
Step 3 After selecting a task file, click Open. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-3.
7-4
Figure 7-3 Information about the imported measurement task
Step 4 Click . In the dialog box, set relevant parameters, as shown in Figure 7-4. You are advised to retain the default settings.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-5
Figure 7-4 Advanced Setting dialog box
In the Advanced Setting dialog box, you are advised to retain the default settings. If you want to change the default settings, read the tip circled in read, as shown in Figure 7-4.
Step 5 Click OK. Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task. Through the analysis, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-5. Figure 7-5 Analysis result
----End
7-6
7.2.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis

To manually set a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Neighbors. Step 2 Click on the toolbar. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6 Manually setting a measurement task
Table 7-2 describes each configuration item shown in Figure 7-6. Table 7-2 Description of each configuration item entered for automatic neighboring cell optimization Configuration Item Measurement step length Measurement period Description Indicates the number of frequency points added each time. The parameter value ranges from 1 to 31. Value 1 indicates that the measurement period is 15 minutes, and value 4 indicates that the measurement period is 60 minutes.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-7
Configuration Item Begin time End time
Description Indicates the time when the system starts to perform a measurement task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes. Indicates the time when the system stops performing a measurement task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes. Add a cell for analysis. Remove a cell to be analyzed. Add all the cells for analysis. Remove all the cells to be analyzed.
Measurement ARFCN
You can manually enter the frequency points to be measured. Separate two different frequency points by using a comma in DBC case.

The Measurement ARFCN field can be null. The cells to be analyzed must belong to the same BSC.
Step 3 Click OK. A manual measurement task is successfully created, as shown in Figure 7-7. Figure 7-7 Task information about the manually entered measurement task
7-8
Step 4 Click . In the Advanced Setting dialog box, set relevant parameters, as described in section 7.2.1 Step 4. You are advised to retain the default settings. Step 5 In the dialog box shown in Figure 7-7, click OK. Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task. Through the analysis, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-5. ----End
7.3 Procedures for Automatic Optimization of Neighbors

Automatic optimization of neighbors provides two optimization modes: manual optimization and automatic bulk optimization. It supports the export of the optimization script and the display of result on a map.
7.3.1 Manual Optimization

To manually optimize Nastar GSM neighboring cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a cell to be analyzed. The system automatically displays the defined neighbors and undefined neighbors of the selected cell and provides recommended operations. Figure 7-8 shows defined neighbors and undefined neighbors. Figure 7-8 Defined neighbors and undefined neighbors
Step 2 Select a proper defined neighbor, and right-click it. A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-9.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-9
Figure 7-9 Selecting a defined neighbor
Step 3 From the shortcut menu, choose Delete Redundant Neighbor. Figure 7-10 shows the operation result. Figure 7-10 Operation result
Step 4 Select a proper undefined neighbor, and right-click it. A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-11.
7-10
Figure 7-11 Selecting an undefined neighbor
Step 5 From the shortcut menu, choose Add Missing Neighbor. Figure 7-12 shows the operation result. Figure 7-12 Operation result
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-11
7.3.2 Other Operations

Automatic optimization of bulk neighbors Click . The system automatically optimizes the specified neighbors in batch mode, as shown in Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 Result of bulk optimization
Exporting the optimization script Click 7-14. . The system exports the optimization result to a sheet, as shown in Figure
Figure 7-14 Exporting optimization data of neighbors
Display of optimization legends Click . The system identifies neighboring relations by using different colors on the topology view, as shown in Figure 7-15.
7-12
Figure 7-15 Legends of automatic optimization of neighbors
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
7-13
8 Automatic Optimization of Frequency
Automatic Optimization of Frequency
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 8.1 Overview 8.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Frequency Optimization 8.3 Exporting the Result of Automatic Frequency Optimization Description The automatic optimization of frequency. The import and analysis of measurement tasks.
The export of the result generated for automatic optimization of frequency.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
8-1
8.1 Overview
Automatic optimization of frequency is based on the analysis of traffic statistics. The principle for automatic optimization of frequency is as follows: The system automatically modifies the BA table of a cell and sends the BA table to an MS in the form of a message. Then, according to the BA table, the MS performs neighbor measurement and reports the measurement result. By checking the measurement result of the corresponding frequency in the measurement result, the system determines whether the cell mapping to the frequency is an undefined neighbor. Table 8-1 lists the versions of the BSC and the M2000 that are related to the implementation of automatic optimization of frequency. Table 8-1 Versions of the BSC and the M2000 Object BSC6000 BSC32 M2000 Requirement V9R8C01 or a later version G3BSC32V300R8C01 or a later version V2R6C01 or a later version
8.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Frequency Optimization

The automatic frequency optimization of Nastar GSM enables you to directly import measurement tasks for analysis. You can also manually set measurement tasks for analysis.
8.2.1 Importing a Measurement Task for Analysis

To import a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Frequency. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-1.
8-2
Figure 8-1 Automatic Optimization of Frequency dialog box
on the toolbar. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 8-2, select a Step 2 Click measurement task file, which is in .xls format.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
8-3
Figure 8-2 Selecting a measurement task for automatic frequency optimization
Step 3 After selecting a task file, click Open. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.
8-4
Figure 8-3 Task information
Step 4 Click . In the Advanced Setting dialog box, set relevant parameters. You are advised to retain the default settings. Figure 8-4 Advanced Setting dialog box
Step 5 Click OK. Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
8-5
Through analysis and calculation, the system displays a dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 Result of automatic frequency optimization
----End
8.2.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis

To manually set a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Frequency. The Automatic Optimization of Frequency dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click on the toolbar.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-6.
8-6
Figure 8-6 Manual Task dialog box
Table 8-2 describes each configuration item shown in Figure 8-6. Table 8-2 Parameter description of each configuration item Configuration Item Measurement step length Measurement period Begin time End time Description Indicates the number of frequency points added each time. The parameter value ranges from 1 to 31. Value 1 indicates that the measurement period is 15 minutes, and value 4 indicates that the measurement period is 60 minutes. Indicates the time when the system starts to perform a measurement task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes. Indicates the time when the system stops performing a measurement task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes. Add a cell for analysis. Remove a cell to be analyzed.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
8-7
Configuration Item
Description Add all the cells for analysis. Remove all the cells to be analyzed.
Measurement ARFCN
You can manually enter the frequency points to be measured. Separate two different frequency points by using a comma.

The Measurement ARFCN field can be null. The cells to be analyzed must belong to the same BSC.
Step 3 Click OK. A manual measurement task is successfully created, as shown in Figure 8-7. Figure 8-7 Task information
Step 4 Click . In the Advanced Setting dialog box, set relevant parameters. You are advised to retain the default settings. Click OK. Step 5 Click OK. Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task. Through analysis and calculation, the system displays a dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-5.
8-8
----End
8.3 Exporting the Result of Automatic Frequency Optimization

Click . The system exports the optimization result to a sheet, as shown in Figure 8-8. Figure 8-8 Exporting the result of automatic frequency optimization
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
8-9
9 Network Performance Alarms
9
About This Chapter
Title 9.1 Introduction
Network Performance Alarms
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Description Introduction to the network performance alarms. Introduction to the type of the performance alarm. How to start, suspend, activate, query, handle, create, delete, modify, filter the alarm tasks, and the query of the history alarm tasks. How to set the performance alarms.
9.2 Types of Performance Alarm 9.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms 9.4 Setting the Performance Alarms
9.1 Introduction
The network performance alarms provide the reports of performance alarms of the entire network devices in quasi real time. You can set and filter the conditions for performance alarm report as required of engineers. According to the alarms, the network maintenance personnel can import maintenance information and handle advice. The related information can be saved and queried. By querying the history performance alarms, you can obtain the details about the history performance alarms.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-1
Figure 9-1 shows the network performance alarms. Figure 9-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree
9.2 Types of Performance Alarm

The performance alarms can be categorized into the following types:

Standard Alarm Optional Alarm Customizing an Alarm
9-2
9.2.1 Standard Alarm

Alarm Caused by Carrier Disabled Cell
To set the condition of the carrier disabled cell, perform as following steps: Step 1 Right-click the TRX Cell Alarm under the Standard Alarm node on the Performance Alarm pane, as shown in Figure 9-2. Figure 9-2 Modify alarm task
Step 2 Choose Modify Alarm Task(M) from the shortcut menu displayed. A dialog box of Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-3.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-3
Figure 9-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box
Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting(K), a dialog box of Alarm Condition Setting is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-4.
9-4
Figure 9-4 Alarm condition setting
Step 4 Select a KPI name from the KPI Name drop-down list, take the TCH Usability as example, the default value is less then 100 percents. For details about the Compare Operation Symbol, Alarm Value and Logic Operation Symbol setting, see Table 9-1. Table 9-1 Alarm condition setting symbol Condition Compare operation symbol Alarm value Logic operation symbol symbol >, >=, =, <, <=, <> Input the float value AND, OR
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-5
Step 5 Click Modify(M), and then the modified alarm condition setting displayed in the Alarm Condition group box of the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-5. Figure 9-5 Alarm condition setting modified
----End
9-6
Dormancy Cell Alarm

When the TCH traffic volume per channel is 0 (Erl), the dormancy cell alarm is generated. Figure 9-6 shows the Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box. Figure 9-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box
In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-7
9.2.2 Optional Alarm

High Call Traffic Volume Cell Alarm
When the TCH traffic volume per channel is equal to or greater than 0.6 (Erl), the alarm of high-volume traffic cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-7. Figure 9-7 Alarm condition setting dialog box
9-8
Low Call Traffic Volume Cell Alarm

When the TCH traffic volume per channel is less than 0.01 (Erl), the alarm of low-volume traffic cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-8. Figure 9-8 Alarm condition setting dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-9
TCH Congestion Cell Alarm

When the TCH congestion rate (including handovers) is greater than or equal to 10%, the alarm of TCH congestion cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-9. Figure 9-9 Alarm condition setting dialog box
9-10
SDCCH Congestion Cell Alarm

When the stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) congestion rate is equal to or greater than 10%, the alarm of SDCCH congestion cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-10. Figure 9-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-11
TCH Call Drop Cell Alarm

When the TCH call drop rate (including handovers) is equal to or greater than 8%, the alarm of TCH call drop cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-11. Figure 9-11 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box
9-12
SDCCH Call Drop Cell Alarm

When SDCCH call drop rate is equal to or greater than 10%, the alarm of the SDCCH call drop cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-12. Figure 9-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-13
Successful Call Setup Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm

When the immediate assignment success rate is less than 90%, the alarm of immediate assignment success cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-13. Figure 9-13 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell
9-14
Radio Connected Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm

When the radio connected rate (including handovers) is equal to or less than 90%, the alarm of radio connected cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-14. Figure 9-14 Alarm of radio connected cell
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-15
Successful Handover Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm

When the successful handovers is equal to or less than 90%, the alarm of successful handover cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-15. Figure 9-15 Alarm of successful handover cell
9.2.3 Customizing an Alarm

You can also customize alarm tasks. For details about how to customize an alarm, see section 9.3.4 "Creating an Alarm Task."
9-16
9.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms

9.3.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks
Starting an Alarm Task
When the system is started, the default status of performance alarms is enabled. You can manually enable or disable alarms. To execute an alarm task, choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Setting > Alarm Filtering Setting. The icon before the menu describes the success of starting the alarm task, as shown in Figure 9-16. Figure 9-16 Starting an alarm task
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-17
Suspending an Alarm Task

Suspending a running alarm task refers to stopping the progress of this alarm task. To suspend an alarm task, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm. Step 2 Choose Disabled from the shortcut menu, the Performance Alarm navigation tree is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-17. Figure 9-17 Suspending an Alarm Task
----End
Activating an Alarm Task

Activating an alarm task refers to executing this alarm task. To activate an alarm task, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.
9-18
Step 2 Choose Enabled from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-18. Figure 9-18 Activating an alarm task
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-19
9.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks

To check an alarm task, double-click the alarm task in the Performance Alarm navigation tree to view the detailed information about this task, as shown in Figure 9-19. Figure 9-19 Performance Alarm navigation tree
Table 9-2 lists the checking methods, status, and results of each alarm message. Table 9-2 Checking alarm messages To Check whether an alarm message is generated, Check the location of the problematic cell, Check the detailed information about an alarm task, You can Check the color of the cell icon in front of the alarm name. Result

Green: indicates that there is no alarm. Red: indicates the alarms are generated and are followed by the number of the alarms.
Click the alarm cell row in the lower right corner of the Alarm Message dialog box. Double-click the alarm cell row in the Alarm Message dialog box of the lower right corner.
On the map, the located area turns red.
The Warn Operation dialog box that contains the detailed information about an alarm task is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-20.
9-20
9.3.3 Alarm Task Process

To perform the alarm task process, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click the row where the alarm is generated in the Alarm Message dialog box. Figure 9-20 Alarm Operation dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-21
Step 2 Select an alarm task. You can enter the information in the Operation Person, Operation Procedure, Operation, and Demo fields, as shown in Figure 9-21. Figure 9-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task
----End
9-22
9.3.4 Creating an Alarm Task

To create an alarm task, perform the following steps: Step 1 Right-click in the Performance Alarm navigation tree, the shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-22. Figure 9-22 Creating an alarm task
Step 2 Choose New Alarm Task from the shortcut menu, the Alarm Template is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-23. Figure 9-23 Alarm Template navigation tree
Step 3 In the Alarm Template navigation tree, select an alarm template, and then click Select.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-23
You can also double-click the selected alarm template, the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-24. Figure 9-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box
In this dialog box, you can set the following parameters:

Task name Time period Alarm circle Task state Start time Alarm cells
9-24
Step 4 In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, click Alarm Condition Setting (K). The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-25. Figure 9-25 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box
In the Alarm Condition Setting group box, you can add a maximum of three alarm conditions. Step 5 After setting the parameters for an alarm, click OK. An alarm task is created and it is added to the Custom Alarm node in the Performance Alarm navigation tree. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-25
9.3.5 Deleting an Alarm Task

To delete an alarm task, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, select an alarm to be deleted. Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and select Delete Alarm Task from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-26. Figure 9-26 Deleting an alarm task
The confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-27. Figure 9-27 Confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task
Custom alarms can be deleted. Standard and optional alarms, however, cannot be deleted.
9-26
9.3.6 Modifying an Alarm Task

To modify an alarm task, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation pane, select an alarm to be modified. Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and choose Modify Alarm Task from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-28. Figure 9-28 Modifying an alarm task
The Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-29.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-27
Figure 9-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box
In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, you can modify the parameters for the alarm task. Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting. The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-30.
9-28
Figure 9-30 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box
You can modify the alarm conditions in the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box. ----End
9.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task

To search for a history alarm task, perform the following steps: Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, select an alarm to be searched. Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and choose History Alarm Query from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-28.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-29
The History Alarm Search dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-31. Figure 9-31 History Alarm Search dialog box
Step 3 In the History Alarm Search dialog box, set the start time and end time in the Start Time and End Time fields. Step 4 Search the alarm task based on the key words, such as the task name, the task operator, the task procedure, the result, and the memo. The checking results can be displayed in an .xls file.
9-30
The Alarm window is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-32. Figure 9-32 Alarm window
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-31
9.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for Alarms

To set filtering conditions for an alarm, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Setting > Alarm Filtrate Setting, as shown in Figure 9-33. Figure 9-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu
9-32
The Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-34. Figure 9-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box
Step 2 Select a cell to be filtered, and then select the KPI to be filtered. Step 3 Select the KPI items (multiple options) from the KPI group box, and then click Add or Delete. Step 4 Click Save. Step 5 Click OK. The setting of the KPI filtering is complete. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-33
9.4 Setting the Performance Alarms

The TaskWatcher scans performance alarms. To configure the TaskWatcher, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click the Bin folder in the \Huawei GENEX\Nastar GSM directory. Step 2 Double-click the TaskWatch.ini file. The Notepad is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-35. Figure 9-35 Notepad
Step 3 Modify the configuration parameters in the notepad. Pay special attention when you modify the parameters under [transdata] and [nastar].The information proceeded by Database= should be in accordance with the information created in the Transdata.
9-34
Table 9-3 describes fields in the notepad.. Table 9-3 Description of fields Field AlarmDormancyTimeOne Description Indicates the start time of the alarm dormancy, that is, from this time on, the alarm function is shielded. For example, 0 indicates 00:00:00. Indicates the end time of the alarm dormancy, that is, from this time on, the alarm function is restored. For example, 6 indicates 06:00:00. Indicates the path of the template of daily reports. Indicates the time delay of the alarm, that is, the delay of the time when the performance data of the BAM is exported. The unit is minute. For example, the performance data imported at 9:00 may be exported to the BAM at 9:25. Thus, the time of the performance alarm is bound to be delayed. Set the time delay based on the specific situation of the actual office. The time delay is around 30 minutes. The recommended setting for the time delay is between 1 to 60 minutes. Indicates the path of the template of monthly reports. Indicates the scanning period for the performance alarms. The default period is 1 minute. If you set the scanning period longer, the impact on the performance of the Nastar server is less. If the performance of the server becomes worse, you can set the period to a longer value. The recommended time period is between 1 to 25 minutes. Indicates the period for the refreshing the alarms. The default period is 1 minute. The longer the period is, the more system resources are occupied. The recommended time period is 1 to 10 minutes. Indicates the priority for the warn thread, and the default value is 16.The bigger the value is, the higher priority the alarm has, that is, the smaller the value is , the lower priority the alarm has. The recommended value is 0 to 31. Indicates the path of the template of weekly reports. Indicates the time for testing the Transdata . Avoid closing the Transdata due to your disoperation. Test the Transdata at regular intervals. If the Transdata is closed, automatically start it. The default time is 10 minutes. Indicates the scanning intervals. The default time is 60 minutes.
AlarmDormancyTimeTwo
DayReportTemplate DelayExecTime_minute
MonthReportTemplate TaskScanCycle_minute
WarnDispCycle_minute
WarnThreadPRI_number
WeekReportTemplate Circle
Scanmiddata
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
9-35
Step 4 Add the shortcut of the TaskWatcher.exe file to the Startup folder. ----End
When the Nastar is installed, set all information about the TaskWatch.ini file based on the actual situation. Incorrect settings for [config] may cause the failure of displaying the performance alarms. Incorrect settings for [transdata] may cause faults in the Transdata program. Thus, the Transdata cannot be started again. Incorrect settings for [nastar] may cause the failure of automatically generating the daily, weekly, and monthly reports. When faults occur to the Nastar, and the Nastar is stopped, the Nastar cannot be normally started.
9-36
10 Generating a Network Monitoring Report
10
Section
Generating a Network Monitoring Report
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes Introduction to the generation of network monitoring report Introduction to the template setting, the generated report and the description of results The statistics on the BSC KPIs. The BSC KPIs include call access, call drop, handover, and performance The statistics on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs include call access, call drop, handover, and performance Mainly for operators to swap the data that does not belong to Huawei. You can use the performance import tool, that is, Transdata, to perform the swap of the performance data, the Nastar GSM to query the database, before swap and after swap, and perform the common guide line statistic of cell grade The enhanced traffic statistics that can be customized according to users' requirements
10.1 Introduction 10.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report 10.3 Network Monitoring Report 10.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report 10.5 Swap Comparison Report
10.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-1
10.1 Introduction
The generation of the network monitoring report is to supply the information for monitoring reports and warnings. The monitoring report includes the KPIs of voice service, data service, and wireless environment. The monitoring report suggests the communication quality completely, and makes operators serve to high-end clients. The Nastar GSM monitoring report includes following functions:

Daily, weekly, and monthly report Network monitoring report PCU performance monitoring report Swap comparison report Enhanced traffic statistics
You can export daily, weekly, and monthly reports or the system automatically exports the reports. You can customize a template and set the exporting time. According to the template, the Nastar GSM can generate report periodically.
10.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report

10.2.1 Background
The daily report is mainly for local maintenance personnel to monitor the network performance. In initial stages, the local maintenance personnel need to learn the running status. They can also locate network problems through the daily report. The daily, weekly and monthly report is intended for network operators. The weekly and monthly report provides the following functions:

Mastering the change trend of the network performance Analyzing the guidance line which contains worsen trend Making optimization and running policy scientifically.
The daily and weekly reports place particular emphasis on the change trend of KPIs.
10.2.2 Customizing a Report Template

To customize the report template, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Report Wizard. The Dialog dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-1.
10-2
Figure 10-1 Report customization template dialog box
Step 2 Click Open to select the template (dayreport.xml, weekreport.xml, or monthreport.xml) to be customized from the directory: \Program Files\Huawei GENEX\Nastar GSM\bin. You can also select the template that already exists in the drop-down list. Step 3 Click New and set the path for the generated report. Step 4 Select Day, Week, or Month from the Report Type group box. Step 5 Set the corresponding properties for Color of Text, Color of Background, Color of Frame, Report Format, and Font Type. Step 6 Select KPI, Over threshold, Worst Cell, TopN, and Chart from the Report Content group box. Step 7 Click Next. The KPI Dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-2.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-3
Figure 10-2 KPI Dialog box
Step 8 Select the time ranges for statistics from the Choose Time group box.
10-4
Step 9 Choose statistic objects from Capability Index of KPI. For details about the buttons of this dialog box, see Table 10-1. Table 10-1 Functions of the buttons Button Used to Add the objects to the statistics field on the right. Cancel the previous options by selecting the objects to be canceled on the right. Select all objects. Delete all objects that are selected.
Step 10 Select the statistic methods for the KPI by selecting the items from the drop-down list in the Method field, and then click Next. The TopN dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-3.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-5
Figure 10-3 TopN dialog box
Step 11 Type the number for the KPI in the Number field. Step 12 Select the index to be sorted from Capability Index of TopN based on the way taken in step 10. Step 13 Set the statistic method of the previous index, and select the index order from the drop-down list.
10-6
Step 14 Click Next. The Over threshold dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-4. Figure 10-4 Overthreshold dialog box
The Overthreshold dialog box lists the following operations for the overthreshold list:

Creating a list Editing a list Deleting a list
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-7
To create a list, do as follows:

Click Create List. The New List dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-5.
Figure 10-5 New List dialog box
In the New List dialog box, enter the list name in the List Name field. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select KPIs from the KPI drop-down list. Set the value for the Compare Symbol drop-down list. Click Add to add searching conditions in the field on the left. You can also select the record in the Search Condition field, and then click Delete to execute such an operation. Click Save, and go back to Figure 10-4. Now a new record is added to the Overthreshold dialog box. Select the statistics objects to be viewed according to the operation described in step 10. Click Save.
A new list is created. To edit a list, do as follows: 1. Select the list name that is to be modified in the Overthreshold dialog box, and then click Edit List. The New List dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-5. 2. 3. In the New List dialog box, modify the information on the list in this figure, and then click Save. Then, go back to the Overthreshold dialog box and select the statistics objects on the right. Then, click Save. Now the list editing is complete.
10-8
To delete a list, do as follows: 1. 2. 3. In the Over threshold dialog box, select the list name to be modified. Click Delete List. Click Next.
The CHART dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6. Figure 10-6 CHART dialog box
Step 15 Select Cell Group, BSC, and NET from the Statistic Object group box. Step 16 In the CHART dialog box, select the index whose charts require to be displayed.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-9
Step 17 Set the items on the right of the dialog box. For details about the setting of the items and their functions, see Table 10-2. Table 10-2 Settings and functions Setting Items Method Chart View3d Showlegend Colorindex Functions Setting the method for collecting statistics on the desired objects Setting the type of a chart Setting the open status of table marks Setting the color description of the table Selecting the color of the table
10-10
Step 18 Click Next. The Worst Cell dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-7. Figure 10-7 Worst Cell dialog box
Step 19 In the Capability Index drop-down list, select the index. Step 20 In the Logic Symbol field drop-down list, determine the logic relation between this index and the last condition. Step 21 In the Operator drop-down list, select the operator, and type the value in the Result field. Step 22 Click Add to execute such an operation to add a search condition. Step 23 In the Search Condition group box, select a condition. Step 24 Click Delete. Step 25 In the Search Index field, select the statistics index of the worst cell. Step 26 In the Method drop-down list, select the method for collecting statistics on objects.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-11
Step 27 Click Finish. The daily, weekly, and monthly report templates are generated. ----End
10.2.3 Generating a Daily Report

Procedures
To generate the daily report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Daily Report, as shown in Figure 10-8. Alternatively, you can click in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.
10-12
Figure 10-8 Daily report command
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-13
The Daily Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-9. Figure 10-9 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box
Table 10-3 describes the elements in the Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box. Table 10-3 Description of the Setting tab page Element Report Saved Path Setting Description Clicking report to select a path for saving the daily
Query Object
BSC
Selecting the BSC to be queried
10-14
Element Time Set Date All Day Time Busy Time
Description Setting the date to be queried Selecting All Day Time to generate the report of the whole day Selecting Busy Time to generate the report during busy hours
NOTE Click Modify Busy Time to open the Busy Time Set dialog box. Set the begin time and the end time in the Busy Time Set dialog box.
Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the daily report, select a BSC to be queried, and set the time to be queried.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-15
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Daily Report dialog box. The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-10. Figure 10-10 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box
Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box. Set the decision condition for the extra busy or idle cell and set the properties for the worst cell.
10-16
Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups in the VIC group box. To add more cell groups, do as follows: 1. Click Cell Group Manage to open the Cell Group dialog box, as shown in Figure 10-11. In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add, delete, or modify cell groups listed in the Cell Group box.
Figure 10-11 Cell Group dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-17
2.
Click New to create a cell group. The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-12.
Figure 10-12 New Cell Group dialog box
3. 4.
In the New Cell Group dialog box, type a cell group name, and select the cells to be added to the group. Click OK in the New Cell Group dialog box.
10-18
Step 6 After setting the report, click OK in the Daily Report dialog box. The generated daily report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-13. Figure 10-13 Daily report
----End
Introduction to the Daily Report

The daily report involves information about cover, KPI, BSC TopN, VIC, Hot Cell, Extra Busy_Idle, Worst Cell, All_Day Traffic Trend. For details about each list, see section "Introduction to the Daily Report" of 10.2.6 "Introduction to the Reports."
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-19
10.2.4 Generating a Weekly Report

Procedures
To generate a weekly report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Weekly Report, as shown in Figure 10-14. Alternatively, you can click in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.
Figure 10-14 Weekly report command
10-20
The Weekly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-15. Figure 10-15 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog box
Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the weekly report, select the BSC to be queried, and set the time range to be queried.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-21
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Weekly Report dialog box. The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-16. Figure 10-16 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box
Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box. Set the decision condition for the extra busy or idle cell and set the properties for the worst cell.
10-22
Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups as VIC cell groups in the VIC area. For details about how to set the cell groups, see section 5.6.3 "Setting Cell Groups." Step 6 After you complete the settings, click OK in the Weekly Report dialog box. The generated weekly report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-17. Figure 10-17 Weekly report
----End
Introduction to the Weekly Report

The weekly report comprises the following sheets:

Cover KPI TopN BSC VIC Radio completion rate trend Call drop rate trend TCH congestion rate trend SDCCH congestion rate trend TCH availability rate trend
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-23

SDCCH availability rate trend CPU load trend
For details about each sheet, see section "Introduction to the Weekly Report" of 10.2.6 "Introduction to the Reports."
10.2.5 Generating a Monthly Report

Procedures
To generate the monthly report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Monthly Report, as shown in Figure 10-18. Alternatively, you can also click in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.
10-24
Figure 10-18 Monthly report command
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-25
The Monthly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-19. Figure 10-19 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box
10-26
Table 10-4 describes the elements on the Setting tab page of the Monthly Report dialog box. Table 10-4 Element on the Setting tab page Element Report Saved Path Setting Description Clicking to specify a path for saving the monthly report. Selecting the BSC to be queried Setting the date to be queried. Selecting All Day Time to generate the report for each day in a month Selecting Busy Time to generate the report for busy hours in a month
NOTE Click Modify Busy Time to view the Busy Time Set dialog box. Set the begin time and end time in the displayed Busy Time Set dialog box.
Query Object Time Set
BSC Date All Day Time Busy Time
Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the monthly report, select the BSC to be queried, and set the time to be queried.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-27
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Monthly Report dialog box. The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20. Figure 10-20 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog box
Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box to display the first N records.
10-28
Step 5 Click OK in the Monthly Report dialog box. The generated monthly report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-21. Figure 10-21 Monthly report
----End
Introduction to the Monthly Report

The weekly report comprises the following sheets:

Cover KPI BSC TopN Worst cell All day traffic trend, radio completion rate trend Call drop rate trend TCH congestion rate trend SDCCH congestion rate trend TCH availability rate trend SDCCH availability rate trend CPU overload trend
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-29
For details about each sheet, see section "Introduction to the Monthly Report" of 10.2.6 Introduction to the Reports."
10.2.6 Introduction to the Reports

Introduction to the Daily Report
The daily report comprises the following sheets:
Cover The title consists of the name of the report and the date, for example, performance daily report 24 August 2005. The date indicates the date when the daily report indicators are recorded, not the date when the daily report is generated. The vendor name is also on the cover. In this case, the vendor name is Huawei.
KPI The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization to evaluate the whole network performance, as shown in Figure 10-22. The font color of the indicators turns red if any exception occurs.
Figure 10-22 KPI sheet in the daily report
10-30
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94% Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95% Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5% Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90% Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90% Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1% SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1% TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2% Call Drop Rate < 80% SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1% SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8% TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)
BSC TopN For each KPI (whole day or busy hours), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells, and sort them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also specify a new value to N (1<= N <=20).
VIC
The font color of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exception occurs, as shown in Figure 10-23.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-31
Figure 10-23 VIC sheet of Daily Report
The scenarios and the associated font color are listed as follows:

Red: the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <= Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true. Red: the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true Red: the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true. Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: the 90% < Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true. Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5% is true. Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true. Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is true. Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true. Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90% is true. Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.
10-32

Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) = 88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% is true. Red: the 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: the 1% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true. Red: the 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: the 1% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate < 2% is true. Red: the 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: the 0.8% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true. Red: the 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: the 2% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true. Red: the 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true. Red: the 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% is true. Red: the 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the 1% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true. Red: the 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the 0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true. Red: the 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: the 0.5% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.
Hot Cell According to the whole traffic of the cell in busy hour, the Nastar GSM finds the Top 10 busiest cells for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs. If a cell is a VIC cell, the background of the cell is highlighted in yellow.
Extra-busy and extra-idle cells The Nastar GSM lists all extra-busy and extra-idle cells, and displays the related KPIs. Worst Cell The Nastar GSM lists the worst cell for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs. All-Day Traffic Trend For the whole network and each BSC, the Nastar GSM collects the statistics of the whole-day traffic by hour.
Introduction to the Weekly Report

The weekly report includes the following sheets:
KPI The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole network performance, as shown in Figure 10-24. The values of the associated indicators are the whole statistical result of the seven days. The font color of the indicators turns red if any exception occurs.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-33
Figure 10-24 KPI sheet of the weekly report
Exception may occur in the following scenarios:

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94% Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95% Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5% Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90% Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90% Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1% SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1% TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2% Call Drop Rate < 80% SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1% SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%
10-34

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)
BSC TopN For each KPI (whole-week statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells, and sorts them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a new value to N (1<= N <=20).
VIC
The font color of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exceptions occur, as shown in Figure 10-25.
Figure 10-25 VIC sheet of weekly report
The scenarios and the associated font color are listed as follows:

Red: the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <= Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true. Red: the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true Red: the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true. Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: the 90% < Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true. Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5% is true. Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-35
Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is true. Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true. Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons = 85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90% is true. Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true. Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) = 88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900)< 92.5% is true. Red: the 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: the 1% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true. Red: the 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: the 1% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate < 2% is true. Red: the 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: the 0.8% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true. Red: the 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: the 2% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true. Red: the 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true. Red: the 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% is true. Red: the 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the 1% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true. Red: the 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the 0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true. Red: the 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: the 0.5% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.
All-Week Traffic Trend This sheet consists of the weekly traffic trend of the whole network and of each BSC. All-Week Radio Completion Rate Trend This sheet is about the radio completion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.
All-Week Call-Drop Rate Trend This sheet is about the call-drop rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour. All-Week TCH Congestion Rate Trend This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.
All-Week SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.
All-Week TCH Availability Rate Trend This sheet is about the TCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.
10-36

All-Week SDCCH Availability Rate Trend This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.
All-Week CPU Overload Trend This sheet is about the CPU overload trend of each BSC in busy hour.
Introduction to the Monthly Report

The monthly report comprises the following sheets:
KPI The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole network performance. The indicators suggest the performance in one month. The font of the associated indicators turns red if any exceptions occur. Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94% Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95% Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5% Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90% Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90% Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1% SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1% TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2% Call Drop Rate < 80% SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1% SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8% TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)
BSC TopN For each KPI (whole-month statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the worst N cells, and sorts them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a new value to N (1<= N <=20).
Worst Cell This sheet lists worst cells in the last day of a month, and the frequency of a cell that turns into the worst cell.
All-Day Traffic Trend This sheet is about the all-day traffic of the whole network and of each BSC. Radio Completion Rate Trend
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-37
This sheet is about the radio completion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of each BSC.
Call-Drop Rate Trend This sheet is about the call-drop rate in busy hour of the whole network and of the each BSC.
TCH Congestion Rate Trend This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of each BSC.
SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of each BSC.
TCH Availability Rate Trend This sheet is about the TCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and of each BSC.
SDCCH Availability Rate Trend This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and of each BSC.
CPU Overload Trend This sheet is about the CPU overload rate in busy hour of each BSC.
10.2.7 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report

The daily, weekly and monthly timing report is finished automatically through TaskWatcher. The procedure for configuring the TaskWatcher, see section 9.4 "Setting the Performance Alarms."
10.3 Network Monitoring Report

According to statistical analysis on KPIs of the BSC traffic statistics, the Nastar GSM generates a monitoring report to help engineers in different regions and in the headquarter to familiarize themselves with the performance of each sub-network in the global network.
10.3.1 Background
The network monitoring report specially used for local engineers, the local engineers and managers can learn the network status and network performance with efficiency from the report. The monitoring report can be categorized into the following types:
Engineer (BSC/CELL) monitoring report Engineer monitoring report supplies details about network performance items, including KPI sorting and graph analysis from BSC to cell. It is convenient for engineers to master the whole performance status, learn the trend of network performance, and locate any possible problem.
10-38

Team leader (network/BSC )monitoring report Team leader monitoring report reflects the whole performance status of network. The team leader monitoring report includes KPI sorting and trend analysis of the whole network and BSC. It is convenient for team leaders to master the whole performance status and to perform the trend of network performance task.
Comparison monitoring report Comparison monitoring report supports the network-level KPI analysis, compares the improved status with the former one, and validates the optimized configuration.
10.3.2 Generating the Network Monitoring Report

The setting interface of generating the network monitoring report contains the following parts:
You can choose a BSC or a cell group to be monitored or choose several BSCs or several cell groups to generate the network monitoring reports orderly. The number of the BSCs and cell groups are not limited. You can enter the statistic begin and end date. You can choose busy time, all-day, or other user-defined time. You can generate the engineer monitoring report, team leader monitoring report, and comparison monitoring report.

Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-39
To generate an engineer report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 10-26. Or click in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace. Figure 10-26 Network Monitoring Report command
10-40
The Network Monitoring Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-27. Figure 10-27 Network Monitoring Report dialog box
Step 2 Click to select a save path for the network monitoring report. Or you can use the default directory. Step 3 Select a BSC to be queried from the BSC list.

You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through Group Management. Click Cell Group Management to view the Cell Group dialog box. In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add a cell group by clicking New. You can also delete or modify cell groups listed in the Cell Group box.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-41
Step 4 Select the associated option based on your requirement.

Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report. Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report. Select Compare Report to generate a compared report.
Step 5 Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields. Step 6 Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day. Select Busy Hour to generate a report for busy-hour traffic. Click Change Busy Hour to view the Busy Hour Setting dialog box, and set the busy hour. Select Other Time to generate a report for traffic in other time periods.
10-42
Step 7 Select the Advanced tab page, as shown in Figure 10-28. Figure 10-28 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-43
Step 8 Set the TopN. Table 10-5 shows the setting options of the TopN. Table 10-5 TopN Options Value N Filtration setting Description The default value N is 10. You can set the value N from 1 to 50. Index Condition 1 The drop-down list shows all the indexes, as shown in Figure 10-29 The first drop-down list is index, as shown in Figure 10-29. The second drop-down list is the relationship. The relationship contains >, < >=, <= == and !=. The third drop-down list is the value control box. The initial value is NULL, you should input the float value. Condition 2 Clear all See condition 1. The relationship between condition 1 and condition 2 is AND. Set all the chosen index condition as the status of not choose, but user selecting or entering data is not cleared. User select or input data is saved by the program and defines the initial data when you use the function the next time. Select all the conditions.
Select all
Figure 10-29 Index
10-44
Step 9 Set the VIC. You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through Group Management.

If you select the VIC cell, the VIC page shows the selected cell content in the report. If you have never selected a cell as a VIC cell, two conditions are described as follows:

Searching object is BSC, all the cells of the BSC are defined as the VIC cells. Searching object is cell group, all the cells of the cell group are defined as the VIC cells.
Step 10 Set the KPI baseline. 1. 2. Select an index. Set two thresholds for the index, the two thresholds are colored for the index. Click Default, the Huawei KPI baseline initializes the threshold.
The lower limit of excellent network is not always larger than the lower limit of normal network.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-45
Step 11 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box. The Network Monitor Report result is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-30. Figure 10-30 Network Monitoring Report
----End
Select Team Leader Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box to generate a team leader report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report. Select Compare Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box to generate a comparison report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.
10-46
10.3.3 Report Description

Engineer Monitoring Report
The engineer monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs and cell KPIs. The default statistical period is seven days. You can set the period for collecting statistics. A report is generated based on each selected BSC. If you plan to select several BSCs, several engineer monitoring reports are generated at the same time. Table 10-6 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report Sheet Cover Description Lists information of the selected BSC:

Project name BSC ID BSC IP address Numbers of BSCs and cells BSC version Network project stage Time and period for the statistical data Performance data Value of each KPI during the statistic period Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
BSC KPI TopN cells with exceptional KPIs TopN cells with exceptional indicators
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart. Lists TopN cells. If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be labeled. The TopN cells are sorted based on the first indictor. Detailed analysis is also provided in the associated links. Provides detailed analysis on the TopN cells with exceptional indicators. These indicators include accessibility, handover, traffic, resource utilization rate, and call drop. If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be labeled. The analysis should cover failure analysis, service analysis, and process analysis.
VIC KPI Readme
Lists the value of each indicator in the period of statistics collection. Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display modes for actual KPI values.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-47
Team Leader Monitoring Report

The team leader monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs in the entire network. The default statistical period is seven days. You can set a period for the statistics collection. A team leader monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC. Table 10-7 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report Sheet Cover Description Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the following items:

Project name BSC ID BSC IP address Numbers of BTSs and cells BSC version Project period of the network Statistic time and period Performance data Value of each KPI during the statistic period Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
Network KPI BSC KPI Readme
Analyze the trend of all the BSC or cell group KPI index. Display the KPI index of each day data in the statistic time period and the related trend chart, you can link the KPI index of each day data to the related trend chart. Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart. Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display modes for actual KPI values.
Comparison Monitoring Report

The comparison monitoring report is used to give the changes of the BSC KPI of different statistical periods. You need to set the start date and measurement period for both the comparison and the statistics collection. The default statistical period is seven days. You can set a period for the statistics collection. A comparison monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.
10-48
Table 10-8 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report Sheet Cover Description Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the following items:

Project name BSC ID BSC IP address Numbers of BTSs and cells BSC version Project period of the network Statistic time and period KPI trend Exceptional KPIs
BSC KPI Readme
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart. Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display modes for actual KPI values.
10.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report

10.4.1 Background
The PCU performance monitoring report is the statistic on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs includes call access, call drop, handover, and the performance. The PCU performance monitoring report monitors the data operating completely and in time. For details about the background of PCU performance monitoring report, see section 10.3.1 "Background."
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-49
10.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report

To generate the PCU network monitor report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > PCU Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 10-31. Figure 10-31 Analysis Reports menu
10-50
Or click
button from the workspace on the left pane.
The PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-32. Figure 10-32 PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-51
Table 10-9 describes the elements in the Network Monitor Report dialog box. Table 10-9 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog box Element File Output Description Click to select a save path for the network monitor report. Or you can use the default directory. Select PCU from the PCU list. Select the associated option based on your requirement. Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report. Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report. Select Compare Report to generate a compare report. Statistic Date Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields. Type a value in the Compare Cycle (days) field. The value must be an integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to enter a valid value.
PCU Report Type
Statistic Time
Set the statistic time.
Step 2 Set the settings of the Network Monitor Report dialog box, as described in Table 10-9. Step 3 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box. The Network Monitor Report is generated, according to the settings in the Network Monitor Report dialog box. ----End

The PCU network monitor report is categorized into the following types:

Engineer Report Team Leader Report Compare Report
The PCU network monitor report aims at monitoring the KPIs of a cell. The default statistical period is one day. You can modify the default period according to your requirements. The PCU network monitor report is generated according to the selected PCU. Each PCU generates one report. You can select multiple PCUs at a time and generate multiple team leader reports.
10-52
Introduction to the Engineer Report

The Engineer Report of PCU network monitor is generated according to selected PCU. The engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-33. Figure 10-33 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report
Table 10-10 describes the functions of each sheet in the Engineer Report. Table 10-10 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report Sheet Cover Description Lists information about the statistic PCU:

Project name PCU ID PCU IP Numbers of BSCs and cells PCU version Project period of the network Statistic time and period Performance statistics Value of each KPI during the statistic period Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-53
Sheet PCU KPI TopN Accessibility Retainability Throughput ( Um ) Throughput ( GB ) Resource Utilization VIC KPI
Description Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart. Lists Top 10 cells and their related indicators. Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related indicators. Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related indicators. Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related indicators. Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related indicators. Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related indicators. Lists the detailed performance indicator for all of the hot cells.
10-54
Introduction to the Team Leader Report

The PCU network monitoring report of Team Leader Report type is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-34. Figure 10-34 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type
Table 10-11 describes the functions of each sheet in Team Leader Report. Table 10-11 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report Sheet Cover Description Lists information about the statistic PCU. The information includes the following items:

Project name PCU ID PCU IP Numbers of BSCs and cells PCU version Project period of the network Statistic time and period Performance statistics Value of each KPI during the statistic period Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-55
Sheet PCU KPI
Description Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart.
Introduction to the Compare Report

The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-35. Figure 10-35 The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type
10-56
Table 10-12 describes the functions of each sheet in Compare Report. Table 10-12 Function of each sheet in Compare Report Sheet Cover Description Lists information about the statistic PCU. The information includes the following items:

Project name PCU ID PCU IP Numbers of BTSs and cells PCU version Project period of the network Statistic time and period Performance statistics Value of each KPI during the statistic period Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
NOTE Statistic begin time is compare time.
PCU KPI
Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart, however, the value of compared is displayed in a chart.
10.5 Swap Comparison Report

10.5.1 Background
The swap comparison report is used for operators to swap the data that does not belong to Huawei. You can swap other vendors' data to Huawei equipment
After swapping is complete, you need to provide the related synchronization swap function of traffic data. You can use the traffic data import tool Transdata of Nastar GSM to perform the traffic data swap. The Nastar GSM also supplies the common KPI statistic function for before and after swap. You can use the Nastar GSM to query database traffic about before swap and after swap.
The swap comparison report is convenient for users to know the change status of network performance.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-57
10.5.2 Generating the Swap Comparison Report

The sheet range of the swap comparison report can be set, as follows:

You can choose the statistical cell group. You can choose more than one cell groups to generate the report. The numbers of the swap comparison reports are not limited.. You can input the date before swap, after swap, and during a statistic cycle. You can choose busy time, all day, and other. You can set the extra worse cell.
To generate the swap comparison report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Swap Comparison Report, as shown in Figure 10-36. Figure 10-36 Swap Comparison Report
10-58
Or click
in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.
The Swap Comparison Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-37. Figure 10-37 Swap Compare
Step 2 Click directory.
to select a save path for the network monitor report. Or you can use the default
Step 3 Set statistic date, statistic date before swap, statistic date after swap, and comparison period of the swap. The comparison period of the swap is from 0 to 31. Step 4 Set statistic time. The default time is all-day. You can set several busy time, but the busiest time is three, or set other time. Step 5 The extra bad cell setting contains TCH Traffic per line ( ERL ), TCH Call Drop Rate ( Including Hanover% ), TCH Congestion Rate ( Including Handover% ). The default values are 0.1, 3 and 5. You can change the values. Set the parameters in the Swap Compare dialog box based on the descriptions in the table.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-59
Step 6 Click OK in the Swap Compare dialog box. The Swap Comparison report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-38. Figure 10-38 Swap Comparison Report
----End
10-60

You can compare the KPI before swap with that after swap. The default statistic cycle is seven days. You can change the date period. The swap comparison report takes the cell group as the statistic object, you can do statistic according to the selected time range. Table 10-13 describes the functions of each sheet in the Swap Comparison Report. Table 10-13 Sheets in the swap comparison report Sheet Cover Description Listing information about the statistic Swap Compare Report:

Project name BSC/Net Name Numbers of BTS Numbers of CELL Numbers of transceiver (TRX) BSC Version Project Phase TCH traffic volume Statistic time and period Swap compare time Update time Performance statistics Value of each KPI during the statistic period Detailed analysis of the related KPIs
CellGroup KPI Compare Cell KPI
Displaying the overview of the cell group KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart Displaying the KPI change trend by the way of displaying on map Displaying the overview of the cell KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart. Displaying the KPI change trend by the way of displaying on map Describing the definition of key performance items, the legend of key performance items, symbol note and formula
Readme
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-61
10.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics

10.6.1 Background
Enhanced traffic statistics can be customized based on various demands of different customers. Using this method, you can execute the arithmetic operation, including summing up, average, maximum, and minimum, according to dates, periods, cells, cell groups, and different categories of BSCs. The enhanced traffic statistics involves the following two operations:

Setting the template of traffic statistics Querying the template of traffic statistics
10.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics

To set the template of traffic statistics, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Traffic Statistics The Report Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-39.
10-62
Figure 10-39 Report Output dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-63
Table 10-14 shows the parameters setting. Table 10-14 Output setting of the report Setting Item Report name Report introduction Export mode Setting type Enter the report name Input the description information of the report Select Horizontal Form from Vertical Form Setting Description Horizontal Form refers to the report output in the form of a horizontal table by hour Vertical Form refers to the report output in the form of a vertical table by hour. Statistic date Input begin and end date, select Type as Whole or List Whole refers to the arithmetic operation to the selected range of time. The result is a generated record. The algorithm for each index varies, which is based on different settings for the arithmetic operations, such as summing up and maximum. List refers to the detailed information about the selected range of time. For example, from 8 to 12, four detailed messages are generated. Statistic time Set statistic time period Select Type as Whole, List or Actual Busy Hour Statistic Object Set statistic object type Actual Busy Hour refers to the hour that experiences the busiest traffic. There are three types: cell, cell group, and BSC If a cell is selected, the information listed in the combo box is that of the cell. The entire template statistics is based on the selected cell. Likewise, if a cell group or a BSC is selected, the listed information is about the previous indexes respectively.
10-64
Setting Item Choose Index
Setting type Select statistic object type and object.
Setting Description Multiple indexes can be chosen. Each has different algorithm such as summing up, average number. The indexes vary with the statistic date and time.
Step 2 For some frequently used templates, click Save on the upper right corner, as shown in Figure 10-40. Figure 10-40 Saving a template
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-65
For the templates that are no more used, perform the following step: Choose Performance Analysis > Frequently Used Statistic Template, and then click Delete on the upper right corner.
----End
10.6.3 Generating the Traffic Statistic Report

Querying the template of traffic statistics involves the following frequently used operations:
Querying the common template Choose Analysis Reports > Common Statistics, and select the required template. In the displayed dialog box, click Report Output at the bottom.
Querying the temporary template Choose Analysis Reports > Enhanced Traffic Statistics.
10-66
At the prompt, type the methods of data statistics accordingly, and then click Report Output at the bottom of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 10-41. Figure 10-41 Report output
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-67
An .xls report is generated. as shown in Figure 10-42 . Figure 10-42 Generating an .xls report

Generating the traffic statistic report contains the following two parts.
.xls report template for common use
According to the template setting, a generated report consists of object name, statistic begin time, statistic end time, statistic time range and each KPI value in created template. You can analyze the generated result secondly. For details about the content, see section 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."
10-68

.xls report template for temporary use

Firstly, Setting template, and generating the related report Secondly, analyzing the generated result for details about the content, see section5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
10-69
11 Further Locating Network Problems
11
Title
Further Locating Network Problems
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Description Introduction to the function of the locating the network problems Description of how to use the Nastar GSM to check the configuration data and generate the check report Introduction to the performance guide line, the querying performance guide line conditions, and how to draw query result, performance guide line geographical Introduction to the KPI performance, the performance of PS KPIs, the cell accessibility, the retainability performance, the inter-cell handover and the outgoing inter-cell handover Introduction to the frequency Introduction to the neighbors Introduction to the half rate and full rate of TRX measurement performance Introduction to the locating problems of the antenna & feeder system Analyzing the uplink interference problems.
11.1 Introduction 11.2 Analyzing the Configuration 11.3 Querying Performance Data 11.4 Analyzing Performance
11.5 Analyzing Frequency 11.6 Analyzing Neighbors 11.7 Analyzing the TRX Performance 11.8 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder 11.9 Analyzing Auto Frequency Optimize
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-1
11.1 Introduction
As to the Huawei GSM network, the Nastar GSM provides the following functions:

Configuration analysis Performance analysis Neighbors analysis Frequency analysis TRX measurement report analysis Antenna & feeder report analysis Uplink interference analysis
11.2 Analyzing the Configuration

11.2.1 Background
In the process of optimizing the network, you can use the Nastar GSM to check whether configuration data is reasonable and to generate a check report. Table 11-1 describes the function of the configuration analysis. Table 11-1 Description of configuration analysis Function Auto Frequency Optimization Report Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report Configuration Check Report Description The report of uplink ARFCNS scan data exported, can distinguish BCCH and TCH, and advise the optimize point and export the script. The data of configuration check report is frequency planning and neighbor relation of user planning or optimized adjusting. The configuration parameters compare appointed BSC configuration parameters and appointed template base line, export the configuration parameters different with the template base line, then generate the configuration check report For the key configuration parameters of the BSC, the Nastar GSM takes the latest data comparison of the history data, export the changed configuration parameters, and generate the configuration parameter compare report The Nastar GSM supplies the function of displaying the key configuration parameters of cell on map.
Configuration Parameters Comparison Report
Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters
11-2
Function Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project Parameters
Description You can use configuration parameters to update project parameters, and keep consistent with present network data. You can refer to the newest project parameter in other place conveniently.
11.2.2 Analyzing the Frequency Optimization

Auto Frequency Optimization Report
To generate the frequency optimization report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Auto Frequency Optimization Report or Click Auto Frequency Optimize > Auto Frequency Optimization Report in the Trouble Shooting pane in the workspace. The Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-1. Figure 11-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-3
Step 2 Click to select a save path for auto frequency optimization report. Or you can use the default directory. Step 3 Select a BSC from the BSC list. The default choice is BSC Top10. You can also choose Select 10 Cells (Must In One BSC).
If you choose the latter, the Export Script function in the Advance Setting tab page is disabled.
Step 4 Click the Advance Setting tab page.

If the related data has not been imported from Transdata, the tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-2.
Figure 11-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there)
11-4

If the related data has been imported from the Transdata, an Advance Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-3.
Figure 11-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box
Step 5 Set Frequency band. Select a band from the Frequency band drop-down list to analysis.
The Frequency band drop-down list enabled only when the related data is imported from the Transdata. There are four bands, P-GSM, E-GSM, R-GSM, and DCS1800.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-5
Step 6 You can choose three range bands at most. Table 11-2 shows the frequency band and the related frequency range. Table 11-2 Frequency band and range Frequency Band P-GSM E-GSM R-GSM DCS1800 Frequency Range From 1 to 124 From 975 to 1023 From 955 to 974 From 512 to 885
The export setting item is optional. You can choose or clear the Export Script check box. Meanwhile, you can set Save Path. Step 7 Click Report Out Setting tab, Click Report Out Setting tab, and then set the Setting option, the default selection is unselected, the tab page is displayed ,as shown in Figure 11-4. If the reference is selected, the check box on the right enabled, and the default value is 5, you can modify the value with the value 1 to 10.
11-6
Figure 11-4 Report Out Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-7
Step 8 Click OK on the Report Out Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box. The Auto Frequency Optimization Report is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-5. Figure 11-5 Auto Frequency Optimization Report
----End
Report Description
The Auto Frequency Optimization Report mainly comprises following sheets:
Overview The Overview describes all items and displays the Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10, the Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10, the Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10, and the Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10 in the form of a chart.
Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10 analysis The Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10 analysis displays the result of the Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10, including Interference Power Value of each cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.
11-8

Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10 The Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10 displays the result of the Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value, fluctuate neighbor frequency information about the recommended Power Value.
Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10 The Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10 displays the result of the Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.
Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10 The Whole NET TCH Interference Average top 10 displays the result of the Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.
When you choose Select 10 Cells (Must In One BSC) in Base Setting, the former 10 cells are chosen by default. Only if there is related data of up Power Value in database, the Band Setting and Range Setting is active. If you choose Export Script, the Export Script will generate .txt file in the related directory. If the Auto Frequency Optimization Report exists blank value in the auto frequency check report, the sign is displayed.

11.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report

Check the rationality of the project parameters to prevent the irrational parameters from being imported. To generate the result of checking in an .xls format, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > ProjectPara Check Report Analysis. The Project Parameter Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-6.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-9
Figure 11-6 Project Parameter Check dialog box
Step 2 Click
to select a path for saving the report, or use the default path.
Step 3 Set the Sheet Setting item. Step 4 Set the numbers of fewer neighbor and the distance of far neighbor. Step 5 Click OK. The parameter rationality check report is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-7.
11-10
Figure 11-7 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file
The report shows the result of frequency utilization check, channel check, Co-BCCH Co-BSIC check, Co-BCCH&Co-BSIC check, single neighbors check, cells with fewer neighbor check, and far neighbor check. ----End
11.2.4 Configuration Check Report

For details about configuration check report, see section 5.2.5 "Checking Parameters."
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-11
11.2.5 Configuration Parameters Comparison Report

Generating the Configuration Parameters Comparison Report
To generate the configuration parameters comparing report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Configuration Parameters Comparison Report. The Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-8. Figure 11-8 Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box
11-12
Table 11-3 describes the items in the Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog box. Table 11-3 Description of the Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box Item File output Description Click to select a save path for the configuration parameter Comparison report. Or you can use the default directory. Select a BSC from the BSCs list. By default, all BSCs are chosen. The net database is current the currently chosen database. Its created date is displayed. Select one backup net database from the Backup Name drop-down list, to compare with the chosen Net Database.
Select BSC Net database Backup network database
Step 2 Set all parameters according to Table 11-3, and then click OK in the Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-9. Figure 11-9 Configure parameter compare report
----End
Each selected BSC can generate one report at a time.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-13
Report Description
The report mainly comprises the following sheets:
Overview

Describes all items Displays related guide line of current BSC
Site adjust, cell adjust, TRX adjust, frequency adjust, neighbors cell adjust, cell parameters adjust Displays the related site adjust information, cell adjust information, TRX adjust information, frequency adjust information, neighbors cell adjust information, cell parameters adjust information.
11.2.6 Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters

For details about the geographical display for configuration parameters, see section 6.2.8 "Displaying Project Parameters."
11.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project Parameters

For details about using configuration parameters to update project parameters, see section "Downloading Configuration Data" of 5.2.2 "Management of Configuration Data."
11.3 Querying Performance Data

11.3.1 Background
The Nastar GSM helps you analyze the optimized data of networks, so that you can find a problematic region quickly. It also supplies many methods for locating problems, to help you sort the problem to cell grade and analyze the reason of a problem to original performance statistic point. The Nastar GSM analyzes the performance data with multi-time granularity and multi-dimensionality method. The functions are as follows:

Displaying the network performance status on a map and a trend chart. Comparing the multi-time band and multi-guideline
11.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline

For details about querying performance guideline, see section "Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File" of 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."
11.3.3 Drawing Query Result

For details about drawing query result, see section "Quick Drawing" of 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."
11-14
11.3.4 Geographical Performance Guideline

For details about geographical performance guideline, see section 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."
11.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line

This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI. Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs. To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-10. Figure 11-10 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-15
Step 2 On the Query Item tab page, select a query item from the Select Query Item list. Step 3 Enter a value in the field of Top N. Step 4 Set the sort order.

If Descend is select, the query result is displayed in a descending order. If Descend is deselected, the query result is displayed in an ascending order.
Step 5 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page to set filter conditions. Step 6 On the Time Range tab page, set the date and the busy hour period. Step 7 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell. Network Group: select cells by cell group.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells. Step 8 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried. Step 9 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
11.4 Analyzing Performance

11.4.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance
Analyzing BSC-Level KPI
To analyze the BSC-level KPI, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click BSC-level KPI Analysis under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page.
11-16
The BSC-level KPI Analysis navigation tree is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-11. Figure 11-11 Trouble Shooting item list
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-17
The BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-12. Figure 11-12 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box
11-18
Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date group box, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-13. A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
Figure 11-13 Busy Time Modify dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-19
Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the BSCs to be queried from the BSC list. You can select one or multiple BSCs. The Queried Objects tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-14. Figure 11-14 Objects tab page
Step 4 Click OK. The query result is generated. ----End
11-20
Analyzing the BSC Overall Performance

This task is performed to analyze the indicators related to the BSC overall performance of Huawei. The procedure is the same as that described in section "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell

The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and to display the values of KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained. To analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting tab page, as shown in Figure 11-15. Figure 11-15 Trouble Shooting tab page
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-21
The One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-16. Figure 11-16 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box
Step 2 Select only one query condition on the Query Item tab page.
11-22
Step 3 Select the Time Range tab page, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-17. Figure 11-17 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box
You can perform the following settings:

In the Date area, select a date from the End Date drop-down list to specify the query date, and then the system can automatically generate the begin date according to the end date you selected. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-13. Only one busy time period is allowed.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-23
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, as shown in Figure 11-18, specify the query object. You can select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs. Figure 11-18 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all cells. Step 5 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
11-24
Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis

This function is to analyze KPIs of the cell level or BSC level in a specified time, and displays the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view. The procedure is the same as that described in section "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance".
Customizing the Cell Filter

During the network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter faulty cells. To filter out faulty cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click User-defined Cell Filter under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The User-defined Cell Filter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-19.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-25
Figure 11-19 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box
11-26
Step 2 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page. The Query Filter Condition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-20. Figure 11-20 Query Filter Condition dialog box
In the Query Filter Condition dialog box, perform the following settings:

Set AND or OR operator, field, condition, and limit value. Click OK, and then the conditions are added to the list. Click Condition Check to check whether the setting is correct. Click Clear Condition to clear the setting.
After the setting is complete, click OK to return to the Query Item tab page.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-27

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-21. A maximum of three time ranges can be specified.
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs. You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells. Step 5 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
Analyzing the TOPN Cells

This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI. Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs. To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-22.
11-28
Figure 11-22 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 On the Query Item tab page, perform the following settings:
Select a query item from the Select Query Item list. Only one item is allowed. Set the sort order.

If Descend is selected, the query result is displayed in a descending order. If Descend is cleared, the query result is displayed in an ascending order
Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page, and set filter conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details on setting filter conditions, see section "Customizing the Cell Filter" Step 2 of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-29

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-23. A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs. You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells. Step 5 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell

The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors. To draw the trend chart of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-24.
11-30
Figure 11-24 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box
Step 2 On the Items tab page, select three query items from the Select Query Item list. Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:
In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-31

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-25. A maximum of three busy time ranges are allowed.
By default, the system queries the cell indicators of the whole day.
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs. By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When more than eight cells are available, the system queries only the first eight cells.
11-32
Figure 11-26 shows the Queried Objects tab page. Figure 11-26 Queried Objects tab page
Step 5 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells

You can search for the worst cells by using the filter conditions. The filter conditions consist of the following parts:

TCH call drop occurs more than six times. TCH traffic volume of each line ranges from 0.1 to 0.6.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-33
To statistically analyze the worst cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Extra Bad Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-27. Figure 11-27 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box
11-34

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-28. A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When more than eight cells are available, the system queries only eight cells. Step 4 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-35
11.4.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs

Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)
The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and display the values of KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained. To learn how to analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell (PS), see section "Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis (PS)

This function is performed to analyze KPIs of cell-level or BSC-level in a specified time, and to display the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view. To know how to analyze the KPIs for a cell on an hourly basis (PS), see section "Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Customizing the Cell Filter (PS)

During the network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter faulty cells. To know how to filter out problematic cell (PS), see section "Customizing the Cell Filter" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing TopN Cells (PS)

This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI. Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs. To know how to analyze TopN cells (PS), see section "Analyzing the TOPN Cells" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)

The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors. To know how to draw cell KPI trend chart of the KPIs for a cell (PS), see section "Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
Analyzing the Extra Bad Cell (PS)

You can search for the worst cells using the filter conditions. The filter conditions consist of:

TCH call drop occurs more than six times. TCH traffic volume of each line ranges from 0.1 to 0.6.
To know how to statistically analyze the extra bad cells (PS), see section "Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."
11-36
11.4.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility

This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to cell accessibility. To analyze the cell accessibility (BSC32), perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) of the Accessibility node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-29. Figure 11-29 Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-37

In the Date area, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-30. A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs. Step 4 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
If you click Multi-View Setting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window. The setting of cell access analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of cell access analysis (BSC32).
11-38
11.4.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance

This function is performed to analyze the performance indicators related to call drop. To analyze the SDCCH/TCH call drop (BSC32), perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) of the Retainability node on the Trouble Shooting page. The SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-31. Figure 11-31 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-39

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-32. A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
If you click Multi-View Setting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window. The setting of SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32).
11-40
11.4.5 Analyzing the Cell Mobility

Analyzing the Intercell Handover
This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to inter-cell handover. To analyze the inter-cell handover(BSC32), perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Inter-cell Handover Analysis (BSC32) of the Mobility node on the Trouble Shooting page. Figure 11-33 shows the Inter-cell Handover Analysis (BSC32) dialog box. Figure 11-33 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-41

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-34.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified. Figure 11-34 Busy Time Modify dialog box
If you click Multi-View Setting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window. The setting of inter-cell handover analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of inter-cell handover analysis (BSC32).
11-42
Analyzing the Outgoing Inter-cell Handover

This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to the outgoing inter-cell handover. The analysis method of the outgoing inter-cell handover is similar to that of the inter-cell handover. To learn how to analyze the outgoing inter-cell handover, see "Analyzing the Cell Mobility Analyzing the Intercell Handover."
Analyzing the Missing Neighboring

To analyze the cell missing neighboring(BSC32), perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32) of the Mobility node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32) dialog is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-35 Figure 11-35 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32)
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-43

In the Date area, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-36. A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.
If you click Multi-View Setting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window. The setting of missing neighboring cell analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of missing neighboring cell analysis(BSC32).
Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors

For details about Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis, see section 11.6.8 "Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors."
11-44
11.5 Analyzing Frequency

11.5.1 Background
Frequency analysis function can check the configuration frequency in the optimization period or programming frequency in the programming period. You can adjust the frequency in time. During performing the frequency analysis function, the Nastar GSM provides the following functions:

Supporting multiple manners of frequency analysis Allowing you to set analysis parameters according to the network condition. Supporting geography display Supporting outputting the frequency modification as the Huawei facility script
There are some common functions to analyze a network, such as adjacent channel check, co-channel and co-BSIC check, unused ARFCNS check, spectrum distribution check, co-HSN and co-MA check, and frequency optimization check. The Nastar GSM supports the following frequencies, as described in Table 11-4. Table 11-4 The range of frequency point and their corresponding frequency band Frequency band P-GSM 900 E-GSM 900 Frequency point range 1 n 124 0 n 124 975 n 1023 R-GSM 900 0 n 124 955 n 1023 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 850 512 n 885 512 n 810 259 n 293 306 n 340 128 n 251
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-45
11.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel

The MA list of the hopping frequency is considered as the frequency point of the co-channel and adjacent channel check.
Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Cell

To check neighbor co-frequency by cell, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-frequency Adj-frequency Check > By Cell, as shown in Figure 11-37. Figure 11-37 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu
Figure 11-38 shows the Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box. Figure 11-38 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box
Step 2 Enter the semi diameter of the cell for check. Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field:

Co-channel Adjacent-channel BCCH, TCH Display labels with Distinguished BCCD and TCH
Step 4 Click OK The mouse pointer is changed into a cross pointer.
11-46
Step 5 Select a cell in the Site View window, and check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the selected cell. The Channel check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-39. Figure 11-39 Channel check dialog box
The current channel is shown in the Current Channel field. Step 6 You can select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click the frequency. ----End or to switch
Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Frequency

To check neighbor co-frequency by frequency, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-frequency Adj-frequency Check > By ARFCN, as shown in Figure 11-40. Figure 11-40 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu
The Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-41.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-47
Figure 11-41 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box
Step 2 Select a frequency band from the drop-down list, and the frequency range auto fill the related frequency band. When the frequency band has two sections, the system supports frequency band display automatically, and the second frequency band range selected with filling the related frequency point. The range of frequency point and their corresponding frequency band, as shown in Table 11-4. Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field:

Co-channel check Adjacent-channel check BCCH TCH
Step 4 Click OK to check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the selected frequency on the whole network. The ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-42. Figure 11-42 ARFCN Check dialog box
The current frequency is shown in the Current ARFCN field of the ARFCN Check dialog box. Step 5 Select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click frequency. ----End or to switch the
11-48
Implications of Each CI
If BCCH and TCH are both selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box, the system marks B, T, B-T and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel. The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:

B-T: compares the BCCH and TCH to current frequency. Meanwhile, the value in TCH is the down (upper) adjacent channel of the current frequency. T-T: compares the TCH of this cell to current frequency. Meanwhile the upper and down adjacent channels also exist in TCH, and the BCCH is neither adjacent nor equal to the current frequency. B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (down) adjacent channel and the TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current frequency.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-49

T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the up adjacent channel of current frequency, and BCCH value is neither adjacent to nor equal to current frequency, as shown in Figure 11-43 and Figure 11-44.
Figure 11-43 Check result of the adjacent channel
11-50
Figure 11-44 Legend window
11.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC

To check co-channel and co-BSIC, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check, as shown in Figure 11-45. Figure 11-45 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-51
The Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-46. Figure 11-46 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box
Step 2 Select one of the following search types in the Search Select field.
Search by specified BCCH and BSIC Enter the cell number of the specified BCCH and BSIC, and the cells are displayed in certain color in the Site View window.
Search co-BCCH co-BSIC in neighbors Search the co-BSIC cells that are mutually adjacent cells. Search Co-BCCH Co-BSIC cells in the whole network Search the co-channel and co-BSIC cell in the whole network, and calculate the distance between the two cells.
11-52
Step 3 Click OK. The Co-channel and Co-BSIC Cell Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-47. Figure 11-47 Co-channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog box
Step 4 Select a cell in the Co-channel and co-BSIC Cell Check dialog box, and right-click the selected cell to save the check result in .txt format.
Click the table header (BCCH, BSIC, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header. Click the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, and double-click the header to sort out the cells in a descending order.
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-53
11.5.4 Checking Idle ARFCNS

To check the idle ARFCNS, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Idle ARFCNS, as shown in Figure 11-48. Figure 11-48 Idle ARFCNS menu
The Idle ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-49. Figure 11-49 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box
Step 2 Set the region for check.

Whole network Selected area If Selected area is selected, you can use window to select cells. or on the toolbar of the Site View
Step 3 Set the frequency range.
11-54
Step 4 Click OK to check the idle frequency. The Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box is displayed, showing Idle ARFCN list, Used ARFCN and times, as shown in Figure 11-50. Figure 11-50 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box
----End
11.5.5 Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate

To check the spectrum utilization rate, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Spectrum Utilization, as shown in Figure 11-51. Figure 11-51 Spectrum Utilization menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-55
The Spectrum Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-52. Figure 11-52 Spectrum Utilization dialog box
Step 2 Set the ARFCN range. Step 3 Select the ARFCN type.

BCCH TCH
Step 4 Click OK to check the BCCH or TCH spectrum utilization rate. The ARFCN Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-53. Figure 11-53 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check
Step 5 Select an ARFCN in the ARFCN Utilization dialog box, and right-click the selected ARFCN to save the check result in .txt format.
Click the table header (Allocate Times, Cell Count, or Utilization) to sort out all cells based on the selected header. Click the header once to sort out the ARFCNs in an ascending order, or double-click the header to sort out the ARFCNs in a descending order.
----End
11-56
11.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA

When different cells have the same MA and the same HSN during setting the hopping data for cells, the network call quality will be seriously influenced. You can check the distance between the same HSN cell and the same MA cells to avoid the influence. To check co-HSN co-MA, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-HSN Co-MA Check, as shown in Figure 11-54. Figure 11-54 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu
The Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-55. Figure 11-55 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box
The MA cells are listed in the Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box. Step 2 Select a cell, and right-click the selected cell to save the check result.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-57
Click the table header (HSN, MA, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header. Click the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, double-click the header to sort out the cells in a descending order. During 1x 1 frequency hopping check, the phenomenon of another two cells unselected appear in the same site is normal.
----End
11.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization

Frequency optimization check generates the analysis result of the frequency interference between cells and the frequency utilization rate. By using the current frequency (BCCH, TCH), adjacent frequency, and a set of available frequencies previously set in the network, you can obtain the idle frequencies for selection. To check the frequency optimization, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Frequency Optimization Check. The Channel Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-56. Figure 11-56 Channel Check dialog box
Step 2 Set the distance range for the cells to be checked. The default value is 30.0000. You can choose three ways to set the frequency range. The frequency supports the range from 0 to 1023. The distance choice is 2-2.5 times of average coverage distance of cell antenna power. For example, the cell sending power coverage distance is 10 km. You need to analyze only Co-frequency adj-frequency cells in 20 kilometers. You can analyze one of the frequency ranges of all frequencies. If the analysis distance is far, the analysis time is long. When the frequency range is wide, the analysis time is long. Step 3 Click OK.
11-58
The mouse turns into the across state. Step 4 Select a cell in the Site View window. The selected cell is marked in green and the ARFCN Display dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-57. Figure 11-57 ARFCN Display dialog box
Table 11-5 describes the elements in the ARFCN Display dialog box. Table 11-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box Element Current ARFCN Description Showing the frequency list of the current cell. The first row shows the BCCH frequency, and the following rows show the TCH frequency. Listing all the frequencies used by the cell, including BCCH and TCH. The frequencies are listed in an ascending order. Showing the used frequency.
Neighbor ARFCN Idle ARFCN
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-59
Step 5 Perform the following operations in the ARFCN Display dialog box.

Click a record in the Idle ARFCN list to display the cell with co-channel and neighbors in the set range. Click an ARFCN in the Current ARFCN list to check co-channel and neighbors in the range set by you. Click a record in the Neighbor ARFCN list to show the information about the neighbors. Mark the co-frequency and neighbors of the ARFCN (display on the map).
----End
11.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report

To generate the report of checking hopping frequency, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Frequency Hopping Check Report, as shown in Figure 11-58. Figure 11-58 Frequency Analysis menu
11-60
The Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-59. Figure 11-59 Hopping report object setting dialog box
Step 2 Select a path for saving the frequency hopping check report Step 3 Select objects to be checked in the Object Select list.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-61
Step 4 Click OK. The report of checking hopping frequency is generated, as shown in Figure 11-60. Figure 11-60 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format
----End
The hopping report only supports HUAWEI BSC32 data.
11.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts

According to the adjusted frequency optimize result of configuration data. The Nastar GSM analyzes the project parameters. According to the required interface of product, the Nastar GSM exports script files. The prerequisite is the information about the local frequency is downloaded from the server and updated.
11-62
To export the frequency scripts, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Export Frequency Script > Last Closed. The dialog box for exporting a path is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-61. Figure 11-61 Browse For Folder
Step 2 Choose the directory. The directory is the path for saving the exported frequency script. Step 3 Click OK. The frequency scripts file is exported. ----End
Program comparison information: you can directly analyze and modify frequency information, and you can also refresh the frequency by auto frequency optimization. You can choose Frequency Analysis > Export Frequency Script > Compared with Configuration.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-63
11.6 Analyzing Neighbors

11.6.1 Background
The Nastar GSM supplies abundant neighbor relation check and modification method, supplies to display the analysis result geographically, and exports neighbor relation as Huawei facility script. Ensure that the *.dbf file is imported before you analyze neighbors. The main functions of the neighbor analysis are listed as follows:
Neighbors relation maintenance and automatic planning

Provides the maintenance function for the neighbor relation, such as displaying, adding, deleting, or modifying neighbors. Provides the automatic planning function for the neighbors with the neighbor relations algorithm based on the accumulated experiences of Huawei. It helps users to save a lot of time and effort. Provides the function for comparing project parameters, including comparison between parameters before modification and parameters after modification, comparison of project parameters between before and after modification neighbor cell relations. Provides the comparison between planned neighbors and configured neighbors.
Data comparing and restoring function
11.6.2 Checking Unidirectional Neighbors

To check the unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Unidirectional Neighbors Check, as shown in Figure 11-62. Figure 11-62 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu
11-64
The unidirectional neighbor check result is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-63. Figure 11-63 Unidirectional neighbor check result
Step 2 Right-click the result window to save the check result. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-65
11.6.3 Maintaining Relation of Neighbors

Displaying Neighbors
To display neighbors, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Neighbor Display, as shown in Figure 11-64. Figure 11-64 Neighbor Analysis menu
11-66
Step 2 Click the Site View window to select a cell. The current selected cell and its neighbors are marked in different colors (divided to unidirectional neighbors and bidirectional neighbors), as shown in Figure 11-65. Figure 11-65 Neighbors relation effect
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-67
Adding Bidirectional Neighbors

To add bidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Bidirectional Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-66. Figure 11-66 Add Bidirectional Neighbors
Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation. You can configure multiple cells as the bidirectional neighbors of the current cell by clicking several times. ----End
Adding Unidirectional Neighbors

To add unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Unidirectional Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-66. Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation. You can configure multiple cells as the unidirectional neighbors of the current cell by clicking several times. ----End
11-68
Deleting Neighbors
To delete neighbors, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Delete Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-66. Step 2 Click one or multiple cells to be deleted. You can select several cells to delete the neighbors' relation with the current cell. ----End
Saving Modified Neighbors

Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Save Modified Neighbors to save the modification of the neighbor relation for the cell.
Exporting Neighbors Comparing Results

Exporting neighbors comparing results comprises the following parts:
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors Maintenance Result > Last Closed to compare the neighbor data with the latest closed project. Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors Maintenance Result > Last Imported to compare the neighbor data with the latest imported neighbor data.
Exporting Neighbors Comparing Script

For details about exporting neighbors comparing script, see section 11.6.9 "Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script."
After the neighbor relation of a cell is added or deleted, the system prompts to save the neighbor relation of this cell first, and then to continue with other network optimization operations.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-69
11.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation

To import the neighbor relation, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Import Neighbors File, as shown in Figure 11-67. Figure 11-67 Import Neighbor File menu
Step 2 Choose a submenu of Import Neighbors File based on a vendor. The dialog box for selecting the corresponding file is displayed. Step 3 Select the neighbor relation file of the manufacturer. Step 4 Click Open. If the configuration file of the manufacturer is in .xls format, continue selecting the relevant sheet of the file. Step 5 Click OK to import the neighbor relation. ----End
11.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format

Analysis of the neighbor relation is based on the original .dbf file. The neighbor relation is imported to the project with the .dbf file. If the neighbor relation changes, the original neighbor relation also changes. If network optimization engineers want to save the optimized neighbor relation, they can first save it to an .xls file. The saved neighbor relation can be used for import when it is required.
11-70
The data formats are as follows:

Horizontal format It is used to describe a cell with only one record of the neighbors. The number of fields is alterable. The first field describes the cell, and the following fields describe the neighbors. Each field describes a neighbor.
Vertical format There are only two fields, but the records can be multiple. The import format and export format must be consistent. It depends on you to choose a format.
Importing Horizontal Format

To import the neighbor relation of the horizontal format, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Horizontal, as shown in Figure 11-68. Figure 11-68 Neighbor Analysis menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-71
The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import window is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-69. Figure 11-69 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box
Step 2 Select the file of the neighbor relation in the horizontal format, and then click Open. The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of the neighbor file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in the list box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, and then click OK. ----End
The horizontal neighbor importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM neighbor. Only when the two files match, you can finish importing successfully. For details, see section 11.6.6 "Exporting Neighbor Relation".
11-72
Importing Vertical Format

To import the neighbor relation of vertical format, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Vertical, as shown in Figure 11-68. The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import window is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-70. Figure 11-70 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import dialog box
Step 2 Select the file of the neighbor relation in the vertical format, and then click Open. The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of the neighbor file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in the list box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, click OK. ----End
The vertical neighbor importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM neighbor. Only when the two files match, you can import the file successfully. For details, refer to section 11.6.6 "Exporting Neighbor Relation".
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-73
11.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation

Exporting Neighbor Relation
To export the neighbor relation, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-71. Figure 11-71 Export Neighbors menu
The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-72. Figure 11-72 Export Neighbors dialog box
Step 2 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the Export Format group box. Step 3 Select one or multiple items to be displayed. Step 4 Click OK to export the neighbor relation table.
11-74

If Horizontal is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-73.
Figure 11-73 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-75
If Vertical Export is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-74. Figure 11-74 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format
----End
11.6.7 Clearing Cell Neighbor Relation

Clearing Configured Neighbor Relation
To clear the configured neighbor relation, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Config Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-75.
11-76
Figure 11-75 Clear Config. Neighbors menu
A message indicating you to confirm the clearing operation is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-76. Figure 11-76 Confirmation box
Step 2 Click Yes. ----End
Clearing Planned Neighbor Relation

To clear the planned neighbor relation, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Planned Neighbors, as shown in
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-77
Figure 11-77 Clear Planned Neighbors menu
A message indicating you to confirm the clearing operation is displayed, as show in Figure 11-78 Confirmation box
Step 2 Click Yes ----End
11.6.8 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors

Redundant neighbors exist when too many neighbors for a cell are available in a network, or when the network topology has changed. Redundant neighbors result in resource waste. Suspected redundant neighbors analysis lists all the suspected redundant neighbors and displays these suspected redundant neighbors on a map. To analyze redundant neighbor, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32) of the Mobility node on the Trouble Shooting page.
11-78
The Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-79. Figure 11-79 Redundant Neighbor cell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box
Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, set Date and Time. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried. Step 5 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-79
The procedure of Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32).
11.6.9 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script

Exporting neighbors adjusting script contains the following parts:
Precondition

The local data downloaded and updated of neighbor information from the server (download the configuration data to local). The project parameter (for displaying the cell on map) imported. The status of the Nastar GSM is online. You can directly analyze and modify the relation information of neighbors (After the project parameters are imported, you can adjust and modify the neighbor relation in a map), this method should in the manual adjust mode. Shows the neighbor relation by auto neighbor optimization arithmetic, this method should in the manual adjust mode. Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors Script > Last Closed to compare the neighbor script information with the latest closed project. Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors Script > Compared with Configuration to compare the neighbor script information with the latest imported neighbor script.
Comparison information
Comparison Result
You can perform the Exporting Neighbors Comparing Script task only when the Nastar GSM is online.
11.7 Analyzing the TRX Performance

11.7.1 Background
Perform the TRX performance measurement in the full speed and the half speed, the measurement performance analysis consists of the following two analysis tasks:

Measurement report analysis TRX/quality/TA/link balance analysis
The sum of measurement report is all of the TRX measurement reports according to the TA call distribution. The TRX measurement performance comprises the following parts:

Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32) Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32) Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000) Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000)
11-80
Through statistic, the sum of measurement reports according to TA call distribution is similar with the full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis. You can take the amounts of full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis report as standard. The amount of measurement report with half rate is not correct of the primary arithmetic.
11.7.2 Analyzing the Measurement Report

Generating the TRX Report
To generate the measurement report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Measurement Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 11-80. Figure 11-80 Measurement Report Analysis command
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-81
The Measurement Report Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-81. Figure 11-81 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box
11-82
Table 11-6 describes the items in the Time and Object Setting tab page in the Measurement Report Analysis dialog box. Table 11-6 Description of Time and Object Setting tab page Item File Output Save path Description Click to select a path for saving the measurement report. Set the begin time of a query. Set the end time of a query. Set one hour of a day. Query by full rate. Query by half rate. Lists the objects selected by BSC. Lists the objects selected by cell. Lists the objects selected by cell group.
Time Setting
Start date End date Busy hour Full Rate Half Rate
Object
BSC Cell Cell group
Step 2 Select the path for saving the measurement report. Step 3 Set the date range, and the period in each day (for example, from 0 to 24) on the Time and Object Setting tab page. Step 4 Select objects of BSC, of Cell, or of Cell Group. And select objects from the list below Object. Step 5 Click the Default Setting tab page in the Measurement Report Analysis dialog box. You can change the setting on the Default Setting tab page, or just leave it as the default. Step 6 Click OK. The carrier analysis report is generated, as shown in Figure 11-82.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-83
Figure 11-82 CarrierAnalyReport
----End
Introduction to the Measurement Report

The measurement report mainly includes the following sheets:
BSC measurement data analysis You can use statistic table to show BSC result. The related BSC index contains the following parts:

Full Rate Uplink Quality% Full Rate Uplink Rexlev% Full Rate Downlink Quality% Full Rate Downlink Rexlev% TA Distribution% Path Balance%
BSC measurement data chart You can use statistic chart to show BSC result, the related BSC index contains the following parts:

Full Rate Uplink Quality% Full Rate Uplink Rexlev% Full Rate Downlink Quality% Full Rate Downlink Rexlev% TA Distribution% Path Balance%
11-84

Problematic Carrier Diagram The diagram lists original index concerning the problematic carriers, and generates the related problem causing and settling methods.
Original Data of Problematic The sheet lists all the original records concerning the problematic carriers in the above chart.
11.7.3 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance

The TRX level/Qual./TA/link balance analysis is performed to analyze measurement-related performance indicators. To analyze the Full Rate TRX level /Qual./TA/link balance(BSC32), perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) of the TRX Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-85
The Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-83. Figure 11-83 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) dialog box
11-86

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified. Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Click Multi-View Setting during modifying the task, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box is displayed. The Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box can appoint the index item of all the multi-view windows. The setting of Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC6000), Half Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32), and Half Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32).
11.8 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder

11.8.1 Background
The arithmetic of antenna & feeder problem location mainly applied in the following conditions:

When you create, move or optimize the network, you may reinstall the antenna & feeder system. Adjusting the existed antenna & feeder system.
The antenna & feeder problem orientation and judgment comprise the following parts:
The sending and receiving antennas of two cells are different You can know the two cells whose sending and receiving antennas are different. One cell sending and receiving antenna is diversity You can know the TRX which the sending and receiving antenna is diversity. One cell receiving antenna is diversity You can know the TRX which the receiving antenna is diversity.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-87
11.8.2 Procedures
To analyze antenna & feeder repot, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Antenna & Feeder Analysis. Alternatively, you can double-click Antenna & Feeder Analysis in the Network Monitor pane on workspace window. The Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-84. Figure 11-84 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
11-88
Table 11-7 describes the items in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box. Table 11-7 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box Item File Output Description Click to select a save path for antenna & feeder report. Or you can use the default directory. Select the Start Time and End Time. You can choose the Common Period.
NOTE The Common Period can change in Analysis Setting of Workspace on the left pane, as shown in Figure 11-85.
Data
Busy Time
The default choice is All Day. If choose Busy Time, you can click Setting to change the value of busy time. You can choose three busy times at most. You can also choose the Other, set the Start Time and End Time.
NOTE The dialog box of Setting is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-86.
Figure 11-85 Analysis Setting menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-89
Figure 11-86 Setting dialog box
Step 2 Set all parameters according to the Table 11-7. Choose Net Element tab page. A network element dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-87.
11-90
Figure 11-87 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
Step 3 Choose the Element or Element Group that needs to analyze from the BSC list. The default BSC choice is none. When Element Group is chosen, you can click Manager CellGroup to manage the cell group. For details about how to set the cell groups, see section 10.2.3 "Generating a Daily Report." Step 4 Click Analysis Parameters tab page. The Analysis Parameters tab page of antenna & feeder analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-88.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-91
Figure 11-88 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
11-92
Table 11-8 describes the items in Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box. Table 11-8 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box Item Analysis Mode Description There are three arithmetic modes.
Arithmetic1 is MainDiversity Arithmetic Analysis. When it is chosen, the DoorLimit1 and AcceptLimit are enabled. The nutterly1 and nutterly2 are disabled. Arithmetic2 is OutCell Handover Analysis. When it is chosen, the DoorLimit1, AcceptLimit, nutterly1 and nutterly2 are enabled all. Arithmetic3 is Arithmetic1 and Arithmetic2. When it is chosen, the DoorLimit1, AcceptLimit, nutterly1 and nutterly2 are enabled all. DoorLimit1: for judging the difference value of main diversity door limit. Its default value is 8dBm, ranging from 1 to 65535. AcceptLimit: for illuminating the difference absolute value of other TRXs and server cells, which within the range of AcceptLimit is receivable. Its default value is 2dB, range from 1 to 65535. nutterly1: for judging which request degrees face and tangent direction less is unreasonable. Its default value is 0, range from 0 to 65535. nutterly2: for judging which request degrees back and tangent direction less is unreasonable. Its default value is 10, range from 0 to 65535.
Parameters
Step 5 Set all parameters according to Table 11-8. Click OK in Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box The antenna & feeder analysis report is generated. ----End
11.9 Analyzing Auto Frequency Optimize

11.9.1 Background
The Nastar GSM can process the uplink ARFCNS scan data of network elements, and display the result in an intuitive manner. You can conveniently judge whether interference exists on the network and choose the ARFCNS effectively.
11.9.2 Procedures
To analyze the uplink interference(BSC32), perform as following steps: Step 1 Choose the Workspace > Trouble Shooting > TRX Performance Analysis > Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC32), as shown in Figure 11-89.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-93
Figure 11-89 Trouble Shooting menu
Double-click the Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC32). The UL Interference Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-90.
11-94
Figure 11-90 UL Interference Analysis dialog box
Table 11-9 describes the items in Time Range tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box. Table 11-9 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box Item Data Time Task Description Description Select the Begin data and End data. Or you can choose the Common date Default time is Whole day. Or you can choose the Busy hour, and Modify busy hour enabled Describes the task
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-95
Step 2 Choose Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box, The Objects dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-91. Figure 11-91 Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box
Step 3 Object Type default choice is Network Element. Select the object from the Objects list. You can only select one object.
11-96
Step 4 Click OK. An uplink interference frequency setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-92. Figure 11-92 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box
Step 5 Set the frequency range, you can set the most three ranges and the input frequency numbers should be less than 96, Step 6 Click OK in the Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box. The uplink disturb analysis report is generated. ----End
The performance of the Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to the Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC32). If the Time Range setting is unreasonable, click OK, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-93. The Uplink Interference Analysis ARFCNS Setting dialog box displays until the Time Range setting turns reasonable.
Figure 11-93 There is no data
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
11-97
12 Predicting Network Trend
12
About This Chapter
Title 12.1 Network Expansion Report
Predicting Network Trend
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Description The background and procedure for generating the network expansion report The background and procedure for generating the LAC analysis report The cell capability analysis, extra-busy cell analysis, extra-idle cell analysis, and busy-hour traffic analysis
12.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity 12.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-1
12.1 Network Expansion Report

12.1.1 Background
The Nastar GSM supports all radio resource utility ratio on one local network. By comparing resource configuration, available network resource, network real traffic, and network designing capacity status, you can obtain the resource utility ratio of network. The network expansion report provides the following functions:

Calculating the number of required TRX cell, according to the designed target network resource utility ratio Calculating the number of required TRX cell which needs enlarge capacity at cell grade Supporting open half rate network expansion
12.1.2 Procedure
To generate a network expansion report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Expansion Report, as shown in Figure 12-1.
12-2
Figure 12-1 Network Expansion Report command
Alternatively, you can double-click Network Expansion Report in the Network Trend pane on workspace window.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-3
The Network Expansion Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-2. Figure 12-2 Network Expansion Report dialog box
Step 2 Set the start date and end date in the Date Setting area of the Parameter Setting tab page. Step 3 Set other parameters in the Settings area of the Parameter Setting tab page. Table 12-1 describes the Settings area in the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog box. Table 12-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog box Item BH traffic stat. mode Capa_cell expansion figure (%) Cov_cell expansion figure (%) Description Set the Statistic mode for traffic measurement during busy hours. Refers to the figure for capability cell expansion. Refers to the figure for coverage cell expansion.
12-4
Item TCH margin TCHs per TRX Capa_cell definition Erl_B GOS (%) Display mode
Description Refers to the margin of traffic channels. Refers to the number of TCH channels per TRX. Refers to the definition of the capability cell. Displays in .xls report or OWC control.
Step 4 Click the Query Object tab page. The Query Object tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-5
Step 5 Specify Object Type on the Query Object tab page.

If BSC is selected, the query objects are listed by BSC. If Cell Group is selected, the query objects are listed by cell group.
Step 6 Select objects from the object list. Step 7 Click OK.
If .xls is set as display mode, the network expansion report is generated, as shown in Figure 12-4.
Figure 12-4 Network Expansion Report
12-6

If OWC is set as display mode, the network expansion report is generated, as shown in Figure 12-5.
Figure 12-5 Network Expansion Report in OWC mode
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-7
12.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity

12.2.1 Background
According to the .xls format file which generated by the LAC capacity analysis, the function contains the following parts:

Supply a better monitoring method, you can get the warning information before the call capacity of network available. You can enhance the network capacity during the primary time of the network planning.
12.2.2 Generating an LAC Capacity Analysis Report

To generate an LAC capacity analysis report, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > LAC Capacity Analysis, as shown in Figure 12-6. Figure 12-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command
12-8
Alternatively, you can double-click LAC Capacity Analysis in the Network Trend pane on workspace window. The LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-7. Figure 12-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
Table 12-2 describes the items in the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box. Table 12-2 Description of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box Item Path Description Click to select a path for saving LAC Capacity Analysis report. Or you can use the default directory. Select an object from the LAC list.
LAC
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-9
Item Data Select
Description Select the start date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields. Type a value in the Statistic Cycle (days) field. The value must be an integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to enter a valid value.
Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day. Select Busy Hour to generate a report for busy-hour traffic. Click Change Busy Hour to view the Busy Hour Setting dialog box, and set the busy hour.
Step 2 Set all parameters according to Table 12-2. Step 3 Click the Param Setting tab page. The Param Setting tab page of an LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-8.
12-10
Figure 12-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
Table 12-3 describes the items in the Param Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box. Table 12-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box Item Paging Mechanism Primary paging success rate Combination efficiency Mmax Description Enter a value in the Primary paging success rate field The default value is 3.2, you can modify it
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-11
Item Paging Mechanism (paging setting: 1 to 3)
Description The range of Paging Mechanism is 1 to 3, and its option is temporary mobile station identity (TMSI), international mobile station identity (IMSI), and NULL
NOTE The option is defined in advance.
Load Parameter
Paging overload PCH overloads
The Load Parameter is optional. The value of Paging overload is 60, you can modify it The value of PCH overloads is 0, you can modify it
Step 4 Set all parameters according to Table 12-3, and then click OK in the Param Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box. An LAC Capacity Analysis report is generated, as shown in Figure 12-9.
12-12
Figure 12-9 LAC Capacity report
----End
12.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report

The LAC capacity analysis report mainly includes the following sheets:
Lac optimization

Mainly contains Lac capacity analyzing result. Advice, according to the result by arithmetic, putting forward the related advice. TOP 10 overload cells. According to the cell call load, the TOP 10 overload cells are displayed. When N is less than 10, the N overload cells are displayed. When the number of the overload cells N is 0, the TOP 10 overload cells sheet is not displayed. Lac call capacity, displays all call capacity of the whole Lac.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-13
Lac redundancy capacity, when overload does not exist or no data is within the selected time range, only the Lac redundancy sheet is generated and the capacity available is displayed. Describes the related guidelines.
Readme
12.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio

12.3.1 Background
The wireless resource utility ratio analysis contains the cell capability analysis, extra-busy cell analysis, extra-idle cell analysis, and busy-hour traffic analysis. The wireless resource utility ratio mainly includes the following functions:
Cell capacity analysis This function is for analyzing the system busy time and real-time of each cell in some day, comparing the KPI and co-selecting the net KPI to do statistic of the system busy-hour. This function can do statistic of the sum of the traffic about 24 hours in one seven days for a cell, and can display with different colors in a sheet. As a result, you are convenient to query and compare the result.
Extra-busy cell analysis This function is for analyzing the extra-busy cells, which meet with the parameters set by user.
Extra-idle cell analysis This function is for analyzing the extra-idle cells, which meet with the parameters set by user.
Busy-hour traffic analysis This function is for exporting the fact busy hour distribution condition for each cell, and busy time KPI for each day.
12.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell

This function is performed to analyze the traffic volume in a week for a cell or for all the cells, and to display the traffic volume in different colors to facilitate your viewing and comparison. To analyze the daily capability of a cell, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Daily Cell Capability Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting pane. The Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-10.
12-14
Figure 12-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box
Step 2 In the Items tab page, select an appropriate Gos value from the Select One Item list. Step 3 In the Time Range tab page, select an end date from the End Date drop-down list, you can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time. Step 4 In the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Step 5 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried. You can select a maximum of eight cells. By default, the system queries all the cells. Step 6 Click OK. The query result is generated in a sheet. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-15
In the Time Range tab page, you cannot set Begin Date and Busy Time, or query the data of the whole day.
12.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells

To analyze the extra busy cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Extra Busy Cell Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-11. Figure 12-11 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin Date and End Date on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour.
12-16
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

12.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells

To analyze the extra idle cells, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Extra Idle Cell Analysis under the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-12.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-17
Figure 12-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin Date, End Date, and Time on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour. Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

12-18
12.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours

To analyze the cell traffic in rush hours, perform the following steps: Step 1 Double-click Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat under the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page. The Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-13. Figure 12-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box
Step 2 Set Begin Date, End Date, and Time on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to use the default common date set by the system. Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour. Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
12-19
12-20
13 FAQ
13
About This Chapter
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Section 13.1 Installing Notice 13.2 Problems of Running Program 13.3 Problems of Importing Data 13.4 Function 13.5 Others Describes Introduction to the notice of installation
FAQ
Introduction to the problems that you will contact at running time, and how to solve Introduction to the problems that you will contact when importing data, and how to solve the problems Introduction to the problems of function Introduction to other problems
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-1
13 FAQ
13.1 Installing Notice

13.1.1 MSDE is Recommended in the Stand-alone Version
MSDE is recommended in stand-alone version, but MSDE is not recommended in SQL Server. The SQL Server requires higher system configuration and occupies more system resources than the MSDE. Huawei recommends that you install the MSDE rather than the SQL Server, because the MSDE is sufficient for the stand-alone version.
13.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar

Question
If you have installed both the Nastar GSM2.4 and the Nastar GSM of the earlier-versions, the MapX component fails to work properly after you uninstall the Nastar GSM of the earlier-version; thus causes many unexpected problems.
Answer
Switching between versions can solve this problem. To solve this problem, performing the following steps: Step 1 Open Add or Delete Programs on the Control Panel. Step 2 Remove the program GENEX Nastar GSM (earlier-versions and the latest versions) from the Add or Delete Programs window. Step 3 Remove the program GENEX Shared. Step 4 Reinstall the Nastar GSM (earlier-version). Step 5 Uninstall the Nastar GSM (earlier-version) complete. Step 6 Re-install the Nastar GSM (the latest version). The system prompts you to install GENEX Shared components package (including MapX, Teechart, OWC, MDAC2.7, and Sentinel Lock Driver), and then you need reinstall the GENEX Shared according to the clew. ----End
13-2
13 FAQ
13.2 Problems of Running Program

13.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License
Question 1
My dongle has expired. How can I update it?
Answer
Update the license to solve this problem, perform the following steps: Step 1 Open the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 13-1. Figure 13-1 License Error dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-3
13 FAQ
Step 2 Click Update. The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-2. Figure 13-2 Open dialog box
Step 3 Select the license file, and then click Open. Step 4 Click OK to complete copying the license. Step 5 Restart the GENEX Nastar GSM. ----End
Question 2
How to obtain a software license online?
Answer
If you are Huawei internal users, you can use the Nastar through obtaining the software license. If you are general users, you need install the network card before obtaining the license, one license is related to only one computer.
13-4
13 FAQ
To obtain the software license online, perform the following steps: Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM main program. The License information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-3. Figure 13-3 License information
Step 2 Send an ESN code to Huawei. After obtaining the ESN code, Huawei sends the license file to you. Step 3 Click Update in the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 13-1. Step 4 Select the license obtained from Huawei. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-5
13 FAQ
13.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the Installation of the Nastar GSM2.4 Hard Dongle Version?
Question
The Nastar GSM2.4 hard dongle version is installed and a new hard dongle is plugged in the parallel port. When starting the program, the system gives a message that the hard dongle is not found yet, and the start fails.
Answer
The problem is caused by the confliction between the latest version and the old one. To handle this problem, perform the following steps: Step 1 Install the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.4. Step 2 On Control Panel, remove the installed the Nastar GSM2.4. Step 3 Restart your system. Step 4 Reinstall the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.4. ----End
13.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?

Question
Why cannot the MSDE be installed correctly?
Answer
Table 13-1 shows the process procedure of the MSDE. Table 13-1 Process procedure
An MSDE instance is installed with the same name as the one you have installed before
In this case, perform the following steps: 1. 2. 3. Uninstall the MSDE Delete all instance files in the SQL Server folder (C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\) Reinstall the MSDE
An MSDE instance is not installed with the same name as the one you have installed before
You can infer that the problem may be caused by the confliction between the MSDE and the SQL Server. Therefore you can uninstall the SQL Server firstly, and then reinstall the MSDE
13-6
13 FAQ
13.3 Problems of Importing Data

13.3.1 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the Latest Version?
Question
After you install a new Nastar GSM version, the main program has been upgraded successfully. If the Nastar GSM is connected to the old database, the performance statistics query task, however, is still old. How to update the performance statistics query task of the old database?
Answer
After installation of the latest version, connect the Nastar GSM to the local Network and run new performance statistics query tasks, if you have created a new local network by Transdata. If you want to upgrade these tasks in an old local network, perform the following steps: Step 1 Select a local Network to be upgraded in the Transdata workspace. Step 2 Open the NET menu, and then click Initial Task. Or right-click a blank area and then click Initial Task to initialize the tasks. After initialization, the performance statistics query tasks have been cleared in the selected local network, and been updated into the latest version. ----End
13.3.2 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM Version?
Question
When you use the latest version (version 2.5) to analyze the results imported by the old one (version 2.5), the interfaces of earlier-version are displayed. How to update these interfaces?
Answer
You need to update tasks. To update tasks, perform the following steps: Step 1 Start Transdata, and then select the database NET node connected currently. Step 2 Select Initial Task on the shortcut menu.
Back up the user-defined tasks before refreshing the task node. After the tasks are refreshed, the interfaces of the latest version are displayed.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-7
13 FAQ
----End
13.3.3 Importing Performance Data Error

Question
Why cannot import the performance data? After importing configuration data, the alarm message is displayed in the output view box, and you cannot import the performance data.
Answer
You can input the SQL Server name and the related user name and password, the SQL server name is always the computer name or IP address. The computer is installed with two operating systems. If you log in to the SQL Server of the Transdata is not the current operating systems sample name, the message box will be displayed during the time of importing the performance data, as shown in Figure 13-4. In the Network Information dialog box, the driver only has one, as shown in Figure 13-5. In this case, you should check the server name is the name of the current operation system. Figure 13-4 Input performance data error
Figure 13-5 Network information dialog box
13-8
13 FAQ
13.3.4 Common Problems in Performance Data Import

Common problems in performance data import comprise the following parts:
Problem: 2006/06/23 10:50:47 cannot Open BSC [TEST_1_8->loudi] Private Task File --- D:\loudic10\data\st010.tsk, Please Check.

Reason: The task definition file is not found in the pubinfo.tsk file. Solution: Check whether this task has been registered in the BAM, the traffic statistic file is dynamically divided by the NAConvert or by the StatTrans, and the .tsk file of the task is removed manually.
Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:59 An item with invalid time was found in C:\Documents and Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053\st053.IDX,skip this item.

Reason: The statistic file contains illegal data. Solution: Check the file source.
Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:54 File C:\Documents and Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053.res Format Error! No ValueSize in different Res file does not match the previous result will be abandoned.

Reason: The items are different in the register file. Solution: Check whether the task changes when the BAM is running. You are advised to import the tasks before and after the modification to avoid data loss.
Problem: task file ST 15.tsk cant match result file ST 15.res, as shown in Figure 13-6
Figure 13-6 Problem hint dialog box
Reason: The internal data in the .tsk file does not match that in the *.res file. Solution: For the statistic data divided by the StatTrans or the NAConvert, clear the Verify Statistic Data checkbox during static data import and try again. If the problem persists, check the data source.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-9
13 FAQ
13.4 Functional Problems

13.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters
Question

When to back up the project parameters? Which of two copies of project parameters are to be compared? What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on the project parameters? When the project parameters are imported in the last time, the system backups the project parameter and saves the backup in the database. By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the system compares the current project parameter table with the last imported one and lists all addition, deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.
Answer

By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to the project parameter table that is lately imported. You should notice that the Undo Project Parameter Modification function can disable all addition, deletion, and modification.
13.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation

Question

When to back up the configured neighbor relation? Which of two project parameter tables are compared by the Project Parameter Comparative Display function? What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on configured neighbor relation? When the neighbor configuration is imported for the last time, the system makes a backup and saves the backup in the database. By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the Nastar GSM compares the current neighbor configuration table with the last imported one and lists all addition, deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file. By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to the backup neighbor configuration table imported for the last time. Note that the Undo Project Parameter Modification function can cancel all addition and deletion operations.
Answer

13-10
13 FAQ
13.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relation

Question

When to back up the planned neighbor relation? Which of two copies of configured neighbors are to be compared? What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on the project parameters? When the neighbor planning is generated for the last time, the system backups and saves the backup in the database. By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the system compares the current neighbor planning table with the one generated in the last planning, and lists all addition and deletion records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file. By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to the neighbor table generated during the last planning. Note that the Undo Project Parameter Modification function can cancel all addition and deletion operations.
Answer

13.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify)

Question How to identify meanings of cell symbols "B", "T", and "B-T" and "T-T' in the co-channel and adjacent channel check of the cell?
Answer For details, see section 11.5.2 "Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel." If BCCH and TCH both are selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box, the system marks B, T, B-T, and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel. The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:
B-T: compares the values of BCCH and TCH with those of the current ARFCN. The values of TCH indicate the lower (upper) adjacent channel of current ARFCN, while the values of BCCH indicate upper (down) adjacent channel of current ARFCN. T-T: compares the values of TCH between this cell and this ARFCN. Meanwhile the values of upper and down adjacent channels are available. The values of the BCCH indicate that it is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN. B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (lower) adjacent channel and the TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN. T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the upper adjacent channel of current ARFCN. The BCCH value indicates that it is neither adjacent to nor equal to current ARFCN.
13.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors

Question Why no corresponding neighbors of the selected cells on the map after neighbor configuration is imported?
Answer The problem may be caused by the following reasons:
The current working layer is on the automatic neighborhood planning. Click switch to the neighborhood configuration layer.
to
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-11
13 FAQ
When the neighbor is imported, the system enables the unique matching based on LAC+CI. Ensure that the imported project parameters of the adjacent cell include LAC+CI data. And the LAC+CI data has a unique neighbor relation.
13.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations

Question When you conduct the network optimization analysis, a map is displayed on the site view, as shown in Figure 13-7.
Figure 13-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check
At this time, the pointer of the mouse is a cross, indicating that network optimization operation is complete. In such a situation, the co-channel and adjacent channel check is being conducted.
13-12
13 FAQ
If you need to check other parts of the map, you have to zoom in, zoom out, or move, as shown in Figure 13-8. Figure 13-8 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check
If you plan to continue the network optimization before executing map operations, what should be done?
Answer After executing the map operations, right-click on the site view. The shortcut menu is displayed.

Click Continue Network Optimization Operation to continue the Network optimization analysis. Click Exit Current Operation to exit the network optimization analysis.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-13
13 FAQ
Figure 13-9 Site View
13.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported?

Question Why cannot the project parameters be exported? The alert commands cannot be executed. And the application is out of date.
Answer Check whether the Microsoft Office Excel is overdue. If Microsoft Office Excel is overdue, activate or reinstall Microsoft Office Excel.
13.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running?

Question Why the running of a task fails? No information about VIC cells is displayed. Answer An error occurs when the Nastar GSM is connected to database. Restart the Nastar GSM.
13-14
13 FAQ
13.4.9 Language of Task Tree

Question The language of the task tree does not agree with that of the main program. Answer If the problem described previously occurs, you can infer that the languages in the Nastar GSM version and the Transdata version do not match. Use the right version of the Transdata and initialize the task.
13.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons

Question The antenna icons shown on the map are incorrect. Answer The font file is not correctly installed. Reinstall the font file.
13.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed?

Question The workspace or Property window is not displayed, though you have chosen the relevant menu.
Answer Check whether the workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border. If the workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border, drag it back.
13.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For?
Question What do Begin time and End time in the network monitoring report stand for? Answer The source data has a range for date. The begin date and end date clearly mark this range.
13.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For?
Question What do Statistic begin date and Statistic end date in the network monitoring report stand for?
Answer When you export a report, you need to learn the range of the date. The begin date and end date mark this. Ensure that the end date is later than the begin date.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-15
13 FAQ
13.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Optimization Analysis
The functions of the channel analysis and network optimization analysis are based on project parameters. If project parameters are not updated, the channel analysis and network optimization analysis are based on the previous project parameters.
13.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters?
Question What problems occur if project parameters are inconsistent with configuration parameters?
Answer The neighbor relation is related to the configuration parameters. After the project parameters are imported, the configuration data fails to be imported if the configuration data from the database is inconsistent with the project parameter. During the download of the configuration data, the configuration data fails to be downloaded if the configuration data in the server is inconsistent with the project parameters. If the configuration data fails to be imported or downloaded, and the Nastar GSM never succeeds in importing or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration information (such as neighbor relation) is null. If the Nastar GSM succeeds in importing or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration is in the previous state. This may affect the accuracy of the analysis result generated by the Neighbors Analysis function.
13.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is inconsistent with That of Frequency Optimization Check
Question Why the result of RNP parameter rationality check is inconsistent with that of frequency optimization check?
Answer
Different check range The RNP parameters rationality check checks the co-BCCH co-BSIC, whereas the frequency optimization check checks co-BCCH co-BSIC and co-TCH co-BSIC of the current cell
Different query object The RNP parameters rationality check checks the configuration data imported from the server, whereas the frequency optimization check checks the configuration data of the local.
Inconsistent LAC and IC The LAC and IC in the local do not match with that in the server database. Therefore, the configuration data of the two checks is different and the check result is different.
13-16
13 FAQ
13.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in the Network Monitoring Report
Table 13-2describes the calculation formula of non-original in the network monitoring report. Table 13-2 Calculation formula of non-original (BSC 32) Name Immediate assignment failure Immediate assignment failure for location update Immediate assignment failure for MTC Immediate assignment failure for emergency call Immediate assignment failure for re-establishment Immediate assignment failure (Other process) ID T2185 T2186 T7283 T2187 Target Expressions Total immediate assignment requests Total successful immediate assignments Attempted channel seizures for location update Total successful immediate assignments for location update Attempted channel seizures for MTC Total successful immediate assignments for MTC Attempted channel seizures for emergency call Total successful immediate assignments for emergency call Attempted channel seizures for re-establishment Total successful immediate assignments for re-establishment Attempted channel seizures for MOC successful immediate assignments for other procedures Successful immediate assignments for MOC Sum of all MS reported: Abnormal release, unspecified
T7281 T2191
T7279 T2193
T7280 T2194
[T7282] [T2195] [T2189]
Unsuccessful outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell handovers (MS reported: Abnormal release, unspecified)
T7198 +T7200 +T7199 +T7197 +T7205 +T7203 +T7210 +T7204 +T7202 +T7207 +T7208 +T7209 +T7211 +T7213 +T7201 +T7212 +T7206 T7222 + T7227 + T7225 + T7219 + T7223 + T7229 + T7220 + T7218 + T7231 + T7230 + T7226 + T7221 + T7224 + T7228
Unsuccessful outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell handovers (HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT)
Sum of all HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-17
13 FAQ
Name Unsuccessful outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell handovers (CLEAR COMMAND take reason) TCH Call Drop Rate (excluding handovers) (%)
ID T7241 + T7243 + T7240 + T7245 + T7242 + T7244 + T7239 + T7238
Target Expressions Sum of all CLEAR COMMAND take reason
(T2142)/ (T2105T2103T2112 T2113)
TCH Call Drop/TCH Assignment Success Successful TCH seizures for intra-cell handover Successful TCH seizures for intra-BSC incoming cell handover Successful TCH seizures for inter-BSC incoming cell handover
13.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Box Is Not the Related Function Dialog Box, Why?
Question
When using the shortcut key, the displayed dialog box is not the related function dialog box, why?
Answer
In such a situation, the shortcut key may be conflicted with the runtime software of minimized task. For example, open PowerWord, and the PowerWord is in status of getting word, the CTRL+F12 shortcut key is use for reciting. At this time, using the CTRL+F12 shortcut key of the Nastar GSM, the result is incorrect. Only when you close the PowerWord, the shortcut key is effective.
13-18
13 FAQ
13.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the View Can Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing?
To adjust parameters, and view can display antenna as zoom changing, perform the following steps: Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Display Setting. The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-10. Figure 13-10 Show Items Option dialog box
Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field to display them on the map.

Site Site Label Antenna Cell Label Sector
Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field. If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. Otherwise, the BTS antenna cannot be displayed. You can set the range based on the antenna density on the map. Step 4 Set the displayed color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field. Step 5 Click OK. ----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-19
13 FAQ
Description
When the displayed area is set from minimum range 0 km to maximum range 50 km, the antennas are displayed too dense on the map. Therefore, the cells are not very clear to be distinguished from other cells, as shown in Figure 13-11. Figure 13-11 Case of a too large displaying area
13-20
13 FAQ
You can adjust the range of the displayed area. For example, set the range from minimum 0 km to maximum 25 km. Then system automatically estimates the area size and the BTS antenna out of the range (0 km to 25 km) is not displayed, as shown in Figure 13-12. Figure 13-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-21
13 FAQ
13.5 Others
13.5.1 Obtaining the Data from the Earlier-Version
Question Sometimes, the on-site engineers need to use the data from the Nastar GSM of the earlier-version. Since the database structure of the latest version has changed, you cannot directly use the original data resource in *.mdb files.
Answer You should first export the important data of the original database to an .xls file. Then use the data import function provided by the Nastar GSM to import the copy of the file to the database of the latest version.
Using the Neighbor Relation Data of Older Versions

To obtain the data of neighbor relation, perform the following steps: Step 1 Open the software of earlier-version. Step 2 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 13-13. Figure 13-13 Export Neighbors command
13-22
13 FAQ
The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-14. Figure 13-14 Export Neighbors dialog box
Step 3 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the area of Export Format. Step 4 Select one or multiple items to be displayed: Cell name, LAC, CI, BCCH, or BSIC. Step 5 Click OK to export the Adjacent Relation Table and save it in an .xls file. Step 6 Open the software of the latest version. Step 7 Select a neighbor file.
Import the neighbors file in horizontal format.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Horizontal, as shown in Figure 13-15.
Figure 13-15 Neighbor Analysis menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-23
13 FAQ
The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-16. Figure 13-16 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box
Click Open. Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors Files > Standard Format > Vertical.
Import the neighbors file in vertical format.
13-24
13 FAQ
The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-17. Figure 13-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box
Click Open.
----End
The format of the neighbor relation imported in the latest version must be consistent with that exported in the older version. For example, if the neighbor relation is exported in horizontal format, then you should import it in horizontal format.
Using Project Parameters

To use project parameters of earlier-versions, perform the following steps: Step 1 Open the software of the earlier-version. Step 2 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-25
13 FAQ
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-18. Figure 13-18 Output dialog box
Step 3 In the Output dialog box, select the parameters to be exported. Step 4 Click OK to export the project parameter of the current project. Step 5 Open the software of the latest version. Step 6 Choose Project >Import Project Parameters.
13-26
13 FAQ
The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-19. Figure 13-19 Open dialog box
Step 7 Select the project parameter table file, and then click Open. The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-20. Figure 13-20 Select Table dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-27
13 FAQ
Step 8 Select the project parameter table to be imported, and then click OK. The Import Setup dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-21. Figure 13-21 Import Setup dialog box
----End
13.5.2 From Tab File to MapX File

Question How to convert the Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX? Answer To convert Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Find the path of MapX Common. For example, C:\Program Files\Common Files\MapInfo Shared\MapX Common. Step 2 Run GeosetManager50.exe. Step 3 Create a map GeoSet. Step 4 Add the existing tab file and import the GeoSet map file. Step 5 Save the map file and the transformation is over. ----End
13-28
13 FAQ
13.5.3 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM

Question Would you like to explain the implications of the handover indicators in the Nastar GSM, since so many indicators are available?
Answer The calculation for handover indicators is relatively complex. Table 13-3 lists the handover success rate at the BSC level.
Table 13-3 Handover success rate Item Handover Success Rate (%) Description ([2265 Successful intra-cell handovers]+[2239 Successful incoming internal inter-cell handovers]+[2240 Successful incoming inter BSC inter-cell handovers]) / ([2264 Attempted intra-cell handovers]+[2201 Attempted incoming inter BSC inter-cell handovers]+[2200 Incoming internal inter-cell handovers]) Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate (%) [2239 Successful incoming internal inter cell handovers + 2243 Successful outgoing internal inter-cell handovers + 2265 Successful intra-cell handovers] /[2199 Attempted incoming internal inter-cell handovers + 2204 Attempted outgoing internal inter-cell handovers + 2264 Attempted intra-cell handovers] Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate (%) Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate (%) [ 2244 Successful outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell handovers / 2206 Attempted outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell handovers] * 100% [ 2240 Successful incoming inter-BSC inter-cell handovers / 2201 Attempted incoming inter-BSC inter-cell handovers] * 100% Summed up at the cell level Summed up at the cell level Summed up at the cell level Level Summed up at the cell level
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
13-29
13 FAQ
Item 900->1800 Handover Success Rate (%)
Description [ 55 Successful inter-cell handovers (900/850->1800/1900) + 69 Successful incoming BSC handovers (900/850->1800/1900) + 94 Successful outgoing BSC handovers (900/850->1800/1900)] /[ 52 Attempted inter-cell handovers (900/850->1800/1900) + 64 Attempted incoming BSC handovers (900/850->1800/1900) + 89 Attempted outgoing BSC handovers (900/850->1800/1900)] [ 56 Successful inter-cell handovers (1800/1900->900/850) + 70 Successful incoming BSC handovers (1800/1900->900/850) + 95 Successful outgoing BSC handovers (1800/1900->900/850)] /[ 53 Attempted inter-cell handovers (1800/1900->900/850) + 65 Attempted incoming BSC handovers (1800/1900->900/850) + 90 Attempted outgoing BSC handovers (1800/1900->900/850)]
Level The corresponding indicators at the cell level are unavailable. Obtain them from the BSC overall performance measurement.
1800->900 Handover Success Rate (%)
The corresponding indicators at the cell level are not available. Obtain them from the BSC overall performance measurement.
The handover success rate at the BSC level serves as reference for the BSC overall handover. In general, the analysis on intra BSC handover success rate, outgoing BSC handover success rate, and incoming BSC handover success rate are enough. The result of handover success rate summed up at the BSC level in the performance analysis is inaccurate, because the intra BSC handover success rate sums up the handovers from cells, in addition to the handovers to cells and intra-cell handover. The handover success rate at the BSC level in the KPI analysis sums up the intra-cell handovers and the handovers to the cell. In case of exceptional handover success rate, check whether the detailed indicators are registered completely.
13-30
14 Acronyms and Abbreviations
14
Abbreviation BAM BCC BCCH BSC BSIC BSS CHR CI CPU CSV FTP GByte GHz GSM GUI HA ID IMSI IP KPI LAC
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Table 14-1 describes the full name of each abbreviation. Table 14-1 Abbreviations Full Name Back Administration Module BTS Color Code Broadcast Control Channel Base Station Controller Base Station Identity Code Base Station Subsystem Call History Record Cell Identity Center Processing Unit Comma Separation Value File Transfer Protocol Gigabyte Gigahertz Global System for Mobile communications Graphical User Interface High Availability Identity International Mobile Station Identity Internet Protocol Key Performance Index Location Area Code
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
14-1
14 Acronyms and Abbreviations
Abbreviation LMT MS MSC MSDE MB NCC OMC PC PCU PLS PNS QoS RNP SDCCH TA TCH TCP TMSI TRX VIC
Full Name Local Maintenance Terminate Mobile Station Mobile Service Switching Center Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine Megabyte Network Color Code Operation and Maintenance Center Personal Computer Packet Control Unit Performance Local Server Performance Nastar Server Quality of Service Radio Network Planning Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel Timing Advance Traffic Channel Transport Control Protocol Temporary Mobile Station Identity Transceiver Very Important Cells
14-2
Contents
Contents
A Introduction to the Data Collection Tool ........................................................................... A-1
A.1 System Description .....................................................................................................................................A-2 A.2 Procedures ...................................................................................................................................................A-3
B GUI of the Data Collection Tool ...........................................................................................B-1

B.1 Main Interface ............................................................................................................................................. B-2 B.2 Menu Bar..................................................................................................................................................... B-3 B.2.1 File ..................................................................................................................................................... B-3 B.2.2 Task .................................................................................................................................................... B-4 B.2.3 Help .................................................................................................................................................... B-4 B.3 Toolbar......................................................................................................................................................... B-4
C Task Management....................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task .................................................................................................................. C-2 C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task ................................................................................................................ C-14 C.2.1 Viewing a Task List .......................................................................................................................... C-14 C.2.2 View the Task Information ............................................................................................................... C-15 C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks............................................................................................................... C-21 C.3.1 Managing a Single Data Collection Task ......................................................................................... C-21 C.3.2 Managing Tasks for the Entire BSC/RNC........................................................................................ C-24
D GSM Index Definition........................................................................................................... D-1 E Engineering Parameters........................................................................................................... E-1 F Shortcut Keys............................................................................................................................. F-1 G Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................... G-1
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Figures
Figures
Figure A-1 Procedures.......................................................................................................................................A-4 Figure B-1 Blank window ................................................................................................................................. B-2 Figure B-2 Interface of the operating tasks ....................................................................................................... B-3 Figure B-3 File menu ........................................................................................................................................ B-3 Figure B-4 Task menu ....................................................................................................................................... B-4 Figure B-5 Help menu....................................................................................................................................... B-4 Figure B-6 Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................ B-4 Figure C-1 BSC/RNC Selection dialog box...................................................................................................... C-2 Figure C-2 New BSC/RNC dialog box ............................................................................................................. C-3 Figure C-3 Information dialog box ................................................................................................................... C-3 Figure C-4 Data Type tab page in the New Task dialog box ............................................................................. C-4 Figure C-5 BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box .......................................................................... C-5 Figure C-6 DataSource Path tab page ............................................................................................................... C-6 Figure C-7 Performance tab page...................................................................................................................... C-7 Figure C-8 Configuration tab page.................................................................................................................... C-8 Figure C-9 Collection Data Time tab page........................................................................................................ C-9 Figure C-10 Collection Task Time tab page.................................................................................................... C-10 Figure C-11 Advance tab page ........................................................................................................................ C-11 Figure C-12 Data Save Path tab page.............................................................................................................. C-12 Figure C-13 Data Reserve Days tab page ....................................................................................................... C-13 Figure C-14 Task list ....................................................................................................................................... C-14 Figure C-15 Interface of checking task information ....................................................................................... C-15 Figure C-16 Interface of checking system logs............................................................................................... C-15 Figure C-17 Interface of task information....................................................................................................... C-16 Figure C-18 Interface of task configuration information ................................................................................ C-17 Figure C-19 Collection Task tab page ............................................................................................................. C-17
ii
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Figures
Figure C-20 Selecting a record........................................................................................................................ C-18 Figure C-21 Task Period Info window ............................................................................................................ C-18 Figure C-22 Upload Task interface ................................................................................................................. C-19 Figure C-23 Selecting a task on the Upload Task interface............................................................................. C-19 Figure C-24 Upload Record Info window....................................................................................................... C-19 Figure C-25 Operation log information interface............................................................................................ C-20 Figure C-26 Deleting or exporting a log ......................................................................................................... C-20 Figure C-27 Title bar in the task information pane ......................................................................................... C-20 Figure C-28 Title bar in the task log pane ....................................................................................................... C-21 Figure C-29 Shortcut menu of a task............................................................................................................... C-22 Figure C-30 Modifying task configuration window........................................................................................ C-23 Figure C-31 Shortcut menu of a BSC node..................................................................................................... C-24
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
iii
A Introduction to the Data Collection Tool
Tables
Table A-1 Data source types for specified versions...........................................................................................A-2 Table A-2 Description of data source ................................................................................................................A-2 Table B-1 Description of buttons....................................................................................................................... B-5 Table D-1 Description of the definition of access index....................................................................................D-1 Table E-1 Engineering parameters .................................................................................................................... E-1 Table F-1 Shortcut keys......................................................................................................................................F-1
iv
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Introduction to the Data Collection Tool
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Section A.1 System Description A.2 Procedures Describes The main functions of the GENEX Nastar data collection tool. The procedures that the GENEX Nastar data collection tool follows.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
A-1
A.1 System Description

The GENEX Nastar data collection tool collects network data. The sources of network data can be:

Network optimization data from the back administration module (BAM) or the M2000 product CHR pre-processed results provided by the performance local server (PLS)
The GENEX Nastar data collection tool collects and compresses the data, and then uploads the processed data to the performance Nastar server through FTP for analysis. In multi-level networks, the data collection tool can process the data that is analyzed by the PNS. The data that can be processed by the current software version of the GENEX data collection tool is CDMA data, WCDMA data, and GSM data. In this document, the CDMA data is taken as an example. The CDMA versions, which are consistent with NE versions, consist of the following versions:

BSC6000V900R001 BSC6000V900R003 G3PCUV300R008C01 G3PCUV300R008C02
Table A-1 describes types of data sources contained in each version. Table A-1 Data source types for specified versions Version BSC6000V900R001 BSC6000V900R003 Types of Data Source The data comes from the following sources:

Configuration Performance
G3PCUV300R008C01 G3PCUV300R008C02
The data comes from the following sources:

PCU Config PCU KPI
Table A-2 describes each data source. Table A-2 Description of data source Data Source Configuration Performance PCU Config Description Configuration data of network parameters Performance data used for performance statistics analysis GPRS configuration data
A-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Data Source PCU KPI
Description GPRS performance data
The current version of the GENEX Nastar data collection tool has the following functions:
Filtering the data Filters the data obtained within the period preset. Collecting the data Copies or downloads the data from the BAM server or PLS server by sharing directory or through FTP.
Compressing the data Compresses the data collected. Uploading the data Uploads the collected data to the GENEX Nastar PNS through FTP.
A.2 Procedures
To install the Nastar data collection tool, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Set system parameters. Step 2 Set parameters for GSM base station controller or for radio network controller. Step 3 Create a data collection task.
----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
A-3
Figure A-1 shows the flow of using the Nastar data collection tool. Figure A-1 Procedures
Start the Nastar data collection tool
Set system parameters
Set the BSC/ RNC parameters
Create a data collection task
Run the task
A-4
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
B
Section B.2 Menu Bar B.3 Toolbar
GUI of the Data Collection Tool
About This Chapter

The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes The main interface of the data collection tool. The functions of the icons on the menu bar. The functions of the icons on the toolbar.
B.1 Main Interface
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
B-1
B GUI of the Data Collection Tool
B.1 Main Interface

You can view the main interface after you start the main program and the GENEX Nastar data collection tool. The main interface consists of menu, toolbar, and display area. Figure B-1 and Figure B-2 show the task information and system log window. Figure B-1 Blank window
B-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Figure B-2 Interface of the operating tasks
B.2 Menu Bar

The menu bar consists of the following items:

File Task Help
B.2.1 File
The File menu enables you to set system parameters, BSC parameters, or RNC parameters. You can also choose to exit the system from the File menu, as shown in Figure B-3. Figure B-3 File menu
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
B-3
B GUI of the Data Collection Tool
B.2.2 Task
The Task menu enables you to create tasks, including GSM, CDMA, and WCDMA tasks. Figure B-4 shows the Task menu. Figure B-4 Task menu
B.2.3 Help
The Help menu contains the help documents and displays the version information about the data collection tool. Figure B-5 Help menu
B.3 Toolbar
The toolbar enables you to perform either of the following tasks:

Creating a GSM task Creating a CDMA task Creating a WCDMA task Viewing the task information Viewing task logs
Figure B-6 Toolbar
B-4
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Table B-1 describes the function of each button. Table B-1 Description of buttons Button Used to Create a GSM task.
Create a CDMA task.
Create a WCDMA task. View the task information. View log files of a task.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
B-5
Tables
C
About This Chapter
Section C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks
Task Management
The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Describes How to create a data collection task. How to view a data collection task. How to manage a data collection task.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-1
C Task Management
C.1 Creating a Data Collection Task

To create a data collection task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Task > New GSM Task. Alternatively, click
on the toolbar.
The BSC/RNC Selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-1. Figure C-1 BSC/RNC Selection dialog box
Step 2 Select a BSC or RNC in the BSC/RNC Name drop-down list. If the BSC/RNC does not exist, click New.
The New BSC/RNC dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-2.
C-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Figure C-2 New BSC/RNC dialog box
Step 3 Enter the BSC/RNC name. Select an NE version. Enter the IP address of the server.
You can also set the busy time in the dialog box.
Step 4 Click OK.

The Information dialog box is displayed, prompting you to save the settings. Figure C-3 shows the Information dialog box Figure C-3 Information dialog box
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-3
C Task Management
Step 5 Click OK.

The New Task dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-4. Figure C-4 Data Type tab page in the New Task dialog box
Step 6 Select one or more data types, and then select the collection mode from corresponding drop-down list.
C-4
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Step 7 Click Next. The BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure C-5.
Figure C-5 BSC Server tab page in the New Task dialog box
Step 8 Set the parameters of the BSC/RNC server.

The BSC/RNC server name has been automatically obtained from the BSC or RNC settings. If you select From FTP Server from the drop-down list in Step 5, you can modify parameters in the Download FTP Server Setting area in the dialog box.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-5
C Task Management
Step 9 Click Next.

The DataSource Path tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-6. Figure C-6 DataSource Path tab page
C-6
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Step 10 Select a path of the data source. The system sets the data source paths of each data type by default. If the default path does not correspond to the actual path, you need to set the path again. Then, click Next.
The Performance tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-7. Figure C-7 Performance tab page
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-7
C Task Management
Figure C-8 Configuration tab page
Step 11 Select an object type.

For example, if configuration data is not selected in Step 6, you can skip this step.
C-8
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Step 12 Choose an object type.

If the selected data type contains the Performance type, you need to select an object type. Otherwise, skip this step. Click Next. The Collection Data Time tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-9. Figure C-9 Collection Data Time tab page
Step 13 Set the time range of data collection.

The time types of filtering can be classified into All-day and Busy Time. If you select a data type that does not need to filter the time, for example, the configuration data, you can skip this step.
The time in End Time must be beyond the time set in Begin Time. Otherwise, the system displays an error message.
Click Next.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-9
C Task Management
The Collection Task Time tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-10. Figure C-10 Collection Task Time tab page
Step 14 Set the time and period of the collection task.

The task operation modes are classified into Instant Task and Scheduled Task.

Instant tasks are performed after tasks are created. The tasks also automatically stop after the operation is complete. Scheduled tasks are performed at the preset start time. The tasks are performed according to the preset time period before they stop.
Click Next.
C-10
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
The Advance tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-11. Figure C-11 Advance tab page
Step 15 Select Zip to compress data. Select Upload To FTP Server to upload data to the FTP server.
In the Nastar GSM, the data collection server and PNS are integrated in one physical server, you can skip this step.
Step 16 Click Next.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-11
C Task Management
The Data Save Path tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure C-12. Figure C-12 Data Save Path tab page
C-12
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Step 17 Set a path to save the data. Then, click Finish.

If the collection task is set as Scheduled Tasks, you can set the longest period to save the data. The unit is day. With reference to the system time, the data collection tool saves only the data during the time period. Saving the data for seven days is recommended. Figure C-13 shows the Data Reserve Days tab page. Figure C-13 Data Reserve Days tab page
Step 18 Click Finish.

----End
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-13
C Task Management
C.2 Viewing a Data Collection Task

C.2.1 Viewing a Task List
After you create a task, the task list is displayed on the left pane of the task information window. Three task lists, namely, GSM, CDMA, and WCDMA, are displayed. Each task folder in the list is categorized according to the BSC/RNC settings, and each BSC/RNC task is categorized into scheduled task and instant task. Each task is named in the way of version number_data type. Figure C-14 shows the Task list. Figure C-14 Task list
C-14
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
C.2.2 View the Task Information

The task information contains the following information:

Configuration information Collection status Upload status Log information
Double-click a task in the task list to view the information about the task and related log files. For a period task, click the related icons to view the task information or log files. Figure C-15 and Figure C-16 show the task information and system log window. Figure C-15 Interface of checking task information
Figure C-16 Interface of checking system logs
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-15
C Task Management
Interface of Task Information

The task information window is divided into three panes. The left pane is a task list. The right pane displays the configuration information, whereas the lower pane displays the log information. Figure C-17 shows the Task Information interface. Figure C-17 Interface of task information
C-16
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Viewing the Configuration of a Task

As shown in Figure C-18, the right pane displays the configuration information. You can modify the configuration information on this interface. Figure C-18 Interface of task configuration information
Collecting Tasks
The lower part of the right task list displays the collection and upload status of tasks. The task collection status information consists of the following information:

Running period Collection status Remarks
Figure C-19 shows the Collection Task tab page. Figure C-19 Collection Task tab page
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-17
C Task Management
Double-click the record to view the detailed collection information, as shown in Figure C-20 and Figure C-21. Figure C-20 Selecting a record
Figure C-21 Task Period Info window
Uploading the Information

The information about task upload consists of the following items:

Task begin time Upload file Upload status Remark
C-18
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Figure C-22 shows the Upload Task tab page. Figure C-22 Upload Task interface
Double-click a task on the Upload Task interface. The Upload Record Info window is displayed, as shown in Figure C-24. Figure C-23 Selecting a task on the Upload Task interface
Figure C-24 Upload Record Info window
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-19
C Task Management
Viewing Log Information

The lower pane displays the information about operation logs, as shown in Figure C-25. Figure C-25 Operation log information interface
Right-click a log record and choose Clear or Export from the shortcut menu to delete or export the log, as shown in Figure C-26. Figure C-26 Deleting or exporting a log
Closing the Task Information Window

Double-click the title bar in the task information pane or in the task log pane to close the task information window, as shown in Figure C-27 and Figure C-28. Figure C-27 Title bar in the task information pane
C-20
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Figure C-28 Title bar in the task log pane
C.3 Managing Data Collection Tasks

C.3.1 Managing a Single Data Collection Task
The management of a single data collection task has the following functions:

Modifying the task configuration Starting the collection Stopping the collection Starting the upload Stopping the upload Clearing an upload record Viewing a task path Deleting a task
For details about how to modify the configuration of a task, refer to the section describing how to modify the task configuration.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-21
C Task Management
For other functions, you can right-click a task on the task list and choose an option corresponding to the desired function from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure C-29. Figure C-29 Shortcut menu of a task
Modifying the Task Configuration

You can double-click a task list. The Task Information interface is displayed. Modify the configuration information on the task configuration information interface. You can modify the following configuration information about a task:

Data source path User name and password required to log in to the BSC/RNC system Data collection time Data collection type Task collection time (available only for scheduled tasks) Whether to compress and upload the data to the FTP server
C-22
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Figure C-30 shows the window of modifying the task configuration. Figure C-30 Modifying task configuration window
Starting the Collection

You can choose Start Collection to start a stopped collection task. If you start an instant task that is uploading data, you need to stop the upload. After the instant task is started, the previously collected data is deleted.
Stopping the Collection

You can choose Stop Collection to stop a collection task.
Starting the Upload

You need to set FTP-related parameters when you set up a task or configure system parameters. If the FTP parameters are not set, you cannot upload the task.
Stopping the Upload

You can choose Stop Upload to stop uploading data.
Clearing an Upload Record

The system saves upload records. If you plan to upload the file again or upload the file to another FTP server, you need to clear upload records before you restart the upload.
Viewing a Task Path

You can choose Browse Task Folder to open the local save path of the collected data.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-23
C Task Management
Deleting a Task
If you choose Remove Task, an information dialog box is displayed, prompting you whether to delete the collected data. If you choose to delete the task, the system deletes the data and tasks. If you choose to not to delete the data, the system deletes tasks whereas saves data.
C.3.2 Managing Tasks for the Entire BSC/RNC

The management of tasks for entire BSC/RNC has the following functions:

Creating a task Deleting a task Deleting the BSC/RNC
Right-click a BSC/RNC node. The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure C-31. Figure C-31 Shortcut menu of a BSC node
C-24
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Creating a Task
When you choose New Task from the shortcut menu, the system automatically creates a task under the selected BSC/RNC.
Deleting the BSC/RNC

To delete the BSC/RNC, right-click the BSC/RNC to be deleted and choose Remove to delete the BSC/RNC. Ensure that the tasks under the BSC/RNC to be deleted are removed before you delete the BSC/RNC.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
C-25
Tables
GSM Index Definition
Table D-1 describes the definition of access index.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
D-1
Tables
Table D-1 Description of the definition of access index GSM Access Index Definition Ite m Inde x Nam e Index Definition Wei ght Class A BSC Class B BSC Class C BSC
Excell ent Thres hold
Eligibl e Thresh old
Minim um Thresh old
Excelle nt Thresh old
Eligibl e Thresh old
Minimu m Thresho ld
Excellen t Thresho ld
Eligible Threshol d
Minimum Threshold
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
D-1
D GSM Index Definition
GSM Access Index Definition Ite m Inde x Nam e Index Definition Wei ght Class A BSC Class B BSC Class C BSC
Excell ent Thres hold From BSC received CHREQ to received ETS IND information, which reported by MS on special signaling channel, it includes the failure resulted by BSC, cell or LAPD over loading, does not include the receive failure resulted by wireless connect random and the connect failure resulted by RACH over loading. [2186 immediate assignment successful rate / 2185 immediate assignment request rate] * 100% 10 98%
Eligibl e Thresh old 96%
Minim um Thresh old 94%
Excelle nt Thresh old 96%
Minimu m Thresho ld 92%
Excellen t Thresho ld 92%
Eligible Threshol d 88%
Minimum Threshold
Imme diate Assig nment Succe ssful Rate
85%
D-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Excell ent Thres hold The success rate of BSC assignment TCH, in very early assignment, assignment and handover flow [2106 successful TCH seizures for call / 2090 attempted TCH for call] *100% 10 98%
Minimum Threshold
TCH Assig nment Succe ssful Rate
88%
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
D-3
Excell ent Thres hold The proportion of SDCCH channel overflow times and SDCCH channel overall times [ 2062SDCCH overflow times / 2048SDCCH request times (overall) ] 10 0.30%
Eligibl e Thresh old 0.80%
Minim um Thresh old 1.20%
Excelle nt Thresh old 0.60%
Minimu m Thresho ld 1.50%
Excellen t Thresho ld 0.80%
Eligible Threshol d 1.50%
Minimum Threshold
SDC CH Cong estion Rate
3%
D-4
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Excell ent Thres hold The proportion of TCH channel overflow times and TCH channel overall times [ 2124 TCH overflow times / 2089 TCH request times (overall) ] 10 0.80%
Minimum Threshold
TCH Cong estion Rate (TCH Overf low) (%)
5%
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
D-5
Excell ent Thres hold The proportion of SDCCH call drop times and SDCCH seizure success times [2070 SDCCH call drop times / 2049 SDCCH seizure success times] * 100% 10 0.70%
Minimum Threshold
SDC CH Call Drop Rate
3%
D-6
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Excell ent Thres hold The proportion of TCH call drop times and TCH seizure success times [2142 TCH call drop times / 2105 TCH seizure success times] * 100% 20 0.80%
Minimum Threshold
TCH Call Drop Rate (Excl uding Hand over) (%)
5%
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
D-7
Excell ent Thres hold The intra-cell and inter cell handover success rate in BSC, including the handover by all reason resulted [54 inter handover success rate in BSC + 48 intra-cell handover success rate] / [50 inter cell handover try rate in BSC +47 intra-cell handover try rate] 20 95%
Minimum Threshold
Hand over Succe ss Rate
80%
D-8
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Excell ent Thres hold The cell rate, when the traffic volume per channel is greater than 0.1 ERL, the call drop rate is greater than 3% or the congestion rate is greater than 5%. The denominator is the total cell number, which per channel greater than 0.1 erl. 10 1%
Minimum Threshold
Worst Cell Propo rtion
10%
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
D-9
Tables
E
Table E-1 Engineering parameters Name MSCNAME BSCNAME SITENAME LONGITUDE LATITUDE ALTITUDE SITETYPE Implication
Engineering Parameters
Table E-1 describes the engineering parameters.
Name of the MSC Name of the BSC Name of the BTS Longitude of the BTS position, in the form of Degree, Minute, Second, or decimal (mandatory). Latitude of the BTS position, in the form of Degree, Minute, Second, or decimal (mandatory). Altitude of the BTS position measured in meters. BTS types, including macro 1800 directional, macro 1800 omni, macro 900 directional, macro 900 omni, micro 1800, or micro 900.Macro means macro BTSs. Micro means micro cells. 1800 and 900 mean sites of 1800M and 900M respectively. Directional means directional BTS whereas omni means omni BTS. Equipment type Phases of a project
EQUTYPE PROJECTPHASE
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
E-1
E Engineering Parameters
Name ONAIR
Implication Whether the system is switched on. The following options are available:

TRUE FALSE Enable Disable ENABLE Disable YES No Y N Y 1 0
ONAIRDATE SURVEYDATE CELLNAME LAC CI BCCH BSIC HSN MA FHMODE GPRS EDGE TRXPOWER TRXS POLARIZATION FEEDERLOSS ANT_HEIGHT
The date on which the system is switched on. The date is in the format of yyyy-mm-dd, such as 2006-2-7. The date on which the survey is started. The date is in the format of yyyy-mm-dd, such as 2006-2-7. Name of a cell LAC number, at most five digits. CI number, at most five digits. BCCH value BSIC value, two digits with each digit between 0 and 7. Fill in the corresponding number. MA Frequency hopping mode. You can select non-hopping, baseband hopping, or synthesized hopping. Whether it is GPRS cell. Fill in TRUE or FALSE. Whether it is EDGE cell. Fill in TRUE or FALSE. Power of a TRX Number of TRXs Polarization mode Feeder loss Antenna height (number)
E-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
Name AZIMUTH MECHTILT ELECTILT ANTENNANUM ANT_NAME ANTGAIN ANTENNATYPE HORIZONTAL_B EAMWIDTH VERTICAL_ BEAMWIDTH CDUTYPE TMATYPE TMAGAIN EIRP REGION VENDOR CITY USERDEF1 USERDEF2 USERDEF3 USERDEF4 USERDEF5 USERDEF6 USERDEF7 USERDEF8 USERDEF9 USERDEF10 PLANPROP TCH
Implication Orientation, unit: degree (mandatory) Mechanical downtilt, unit: degree Electric downtilt, unit: degree Number of antennas Name of the antenna Antenna gain Antenna type Horizontal beamwidth Vertical beamwidth CDU type Type of the tower mounted amplifier Gain of the tower mounted amplifier EIRP Region attribute of the cell. This parameter is used in the performance data. Name of the equipment supplier City to which the cell belongs. This parameter is used in the performance data. User-defined attribute 1 User-defined attribute 2 User-defined attribute 3 User-defined attribute 4 User-defined attribute 5 User-defined attribute 6 User-defined attribute 7 User-defined attribute 8 User-defined attribute 9 User-defined attribute 10 Planning attribute, used in automatic neighbor planning. Fill in downtown area, suburb, or countryside. TCH value. Multiple values should be separated by semicolon.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
E-3
Tables
F
Table F-1 describes the function of the shortcut keys. Table F-1 Shortcut keys Shortcut Keys Ctrl+O Ctrl+I Ctrl+Shift+I Ctrl+P Ctrl+Shift+P Ctrl+1 Ctrl+2 Ctrl+3 Ctrl+4 Ctrl+5 Ctrl+6 Ctrl+7 Ctrl+8 F10 F9 F8 F7 Ctrl+D Used to Open an existing project. Import engineering parameter files. Export engineering parameter files.
Shortcut Keys
During the co-channel and adjacent channel check, you can use shortcut keys to check different frequency.
Import configuration parameters (Huawei as default). Export configuration parameters (Huawei as default). Display the Daily Report window. Display the Monthly Report window. Display the Weekly Report window. Display the Semi-monthly Report window. Display the Health Check Report window. Display the Network Monitoring Report window. Display the Quality Evaluation Report window. Display the Capacity Expansion Report window. Switch the Workspace window. Switch the Property window. Switch the Site Navigator window. Switch the Legend window. Switch between layer 1800 and 900.
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
F-1
F Shortcut Keys
Shortcut Keys Ctrl+Q Ctrl+F Ctrl+B Ctrl+G Ctrl+K Ctrl+E Shift+left-click Ctrl+left-click Ctrl+left-click Ctrl+V Ctrl+C Ctrl+X Ctrl+R Ctrl+T
Used to Switch between simulation neighbor and configuration neighbor. Search for a cell. Display the romanced engineering parameter setting window. Switch to distance measuring window. Switch the grid effect. Display neighbors. On condition that neighbors are displayed, press Shift, and click a cell to add unidirectional neighbor. On condition that neighbors are displayed, press Ctrl, and click a cell to add bidirectional neighbor (not selected as precondition). On condition that neighbors are displayed, press Ctrl, and click a cell to deleted neighbor (Selected as precondition). Check co-channel by cell. Check co-channel by ARFCN. Search cell by co-channel and co BSIC. Search for idle frequencies. Check the spectrum efficiency.
F-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
Tables
G
Abbreviation BAM BCC BCCH BSC BSIC BSS CHR CI CPU CSV FTP GByte GHz GSM GUI HA ID IMSI IP KPI LAC LMT
Acronyms and Abbreviations

Full Name Back Administration Module BTS Color Code Broadcast Control Channel Base Station Controller Base Station Identity Code Base Station Subsystem Call History Record Cell Identity Center Processing Unit Comma Separation Value File Transfer Protocol Gigabyte Gigahertz Global System for Mobile communications Graphical User Interface High Availability Identity International Mobile Station Identity Internet Protocol Key Performance Index Location Area Code Local Maintenance Terminate
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)
G-1
G Acronyms and Abbreviations
Abbreviation MS MSC MSDE MB NCC OMC PC PCU PLS PNS QoS RNP SDCCH TA TCH TCP TMSI TRX VIC
Full Name Mobile Station Mobile Service Switching Center Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine Megabyte Network Color Code Operation and Maintenance Center Personal Computer Packet Control Unit Performance Local Server Performance Nastar Server Quality of Service Radio Network Planning Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel Timing Advance Traffic Channel Transport Control Protocol Temporary Mobile Station Identity Transceiver Very Important Cells
G-2
Issue 03 (2008-04-07)

Nastar GSM User Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Nastar GSM User Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GENEX Nastar GSM V200R005

Issue Date Part Number

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

About This Document

About This Document

Network planning and optimization engineers Technical support engineer

2 Installation of the Nastar GSM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-29)

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-02-22)

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-04-07)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

2 Installation of the Nastar GSM ...............................................................................................2-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

4 Using the Transdata...................................................................................................................4-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Manual Version 03(2008-04-07)

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

5 Common Operations .................................................................................................................5-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6 Optimizing the Network ..........................................................................................................6-1

7 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors..................................................................................7-1

8 Automatic Optimization of Frequency ..................................................................................8-1

9 Network Performance Alarms .................................................................................................9-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Manual Version 03(2008-04-07)

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

10 Generating a Network Monitoring Report .......................................................................10-1

11 Further Locating Network Problems..................................................................................11-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Manual Version 03(2008-04-07)

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

12 Predicting Network Trend ...................................................................................................12-1

14 Acronyms and Abbreviations..............................................................................................14-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Manual Version 03(2008-04-07)

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Manual Version 03(2008-04-07)

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM User Manual

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.